Digital PDFs
Documents
Guest
Register
Log In
EK-0LA75-RM-2
August 1987
236 pages
Original
63MB
view
download
OCR Version
33MB
view
download
Document:
LA75 Companion Printer Programmer Reference Manual
Order Number:
EK-0LA75-RM
Revision:
2
Pages:
236
Original Filename:
OCR Text
EK-OLA75-RM-002 - LA75 Companion Printer - Programmer Reference Manual Prepared by Educational Services of Digital Equipment Corporation 1st Edition, August 1986 2nd Edition, February 1987 Copyright © 1986. 1987 by Digital Equipment Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Printed in Japan. The reproduction of this material, in part or whole, is strictly prohibited. For copy information, contact the Educational Services Department, Dlgxtal Equipment Corporation. Maynard, Massachusetts 01754. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may ap- pear in this document. This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed properly. that is in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of part 15 of FCC Rules. which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residen- tial installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interterence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of o & Relocate the receiver with respect to the printer. Move the printer away from the receiver. e Reorient the receiving antenna. € the following measures. Plug the printer into a different outlet so that the printer and receiver are on different branch circuits. [t necessary. the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ television technician tor additional suggestions. The user may find the booklet How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems. prepared by the Federal Communications Commission, helpful. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington. D ' 004-000-00345-4. 20402. Stock No. IBM?® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. IBM ProprinterTM is a trademark of International Business Machines - Corporation. The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation. Maynard. Massachusetts. d of1]t/a) 8 DECUS DEC DECmate DECnet LA DECsystem-10 MASSBUS DECSYSTEM-20 PDP P/OS UNIBUS DECwriter Professional VAX DIBOL Rainbow VMS RSTS VT RSX Work Processor | i, i CONTENTS INTRODUCTION PART 1 GENERAL INFORMATION CHAPTER 1 FEATURES e eeeti e e e e e 7 1.1.1 General . . . . . . C e e e TextMode. . . . ... . ... ... e e v ... . 8 1.1.2 GraphicMode. . . . . . . . . . ... ..o 8 Downline-Loadable Memory. . . . . . . . .. .. .. ... 8 1.1 1.1.3 1.1.4 Options . . . ... ... ....... e e e e e e 1.1.5 LA75Features. . . . . . . ... .. ... ..........9 1.2 Specifications . . . . . . . .. ... 0 oo 9 9 CHAPTER 2 PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS Serial Data Interface 2.1 2.2 2.3 - . . . . . . . ... .. ... ...... EIA Interface Connector Interface Signals . . . . . .. ... ... ...... . . . . . . . .. .. ... ...SR 2.3.1 SendCommon. . . .. 2.3.2 Receive Common . . . . . . . R 2.3.3 Receive Data 2.3.4 SendData. 2.3.5 Terminal Ready . . . . . 2.3.6 SR § . 15 e e e 15 ST ... ... .. e . . . ... ... ... .. ... ... . . .. ... . ... ....... DataSetReady . . . . . .. . ... .. G 13 15 ... ........SEVORTARILE S . . . . .. . . 13 ERN L w 15 16 16 2.4 Data Format. . . . . . . ... ... ..... UL 16 2.5 Baud Rates 18 2.6 Input Buffer Control. . . . . ... ... ... ..... Te . . . . . . . . ... . ... ... . 18 2.6.1 XON/XOFF Protocol . . . . . .. ... ... ... .... 18 2.6.2 Input Buffer Processing. . . 19 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.1.1 2.7.1.2 2.7.2 2.7.2.1 2.7.2.2 . . . ... ... R Front Panel Controls and Operatmg Modes. Print Mode Controls and Operation. . . . . ... . . . . . . e Print Mode Controls and Indicators 20 e e21 . . . . . . . .. .. 21 Using Print Mode. . . . . .. .. ...... T Y. . Set-up Mode Controls and Opemtmn ............ 22 23 SelectStates . . . . . ... .. ... .... e e e Entering Set-upMode . . . . . . . . . ... e . 23 24 i 2.7.2.3 Changing Set-up Parameters . . 2.7.2.4 Re-entering the Feature Select State. 2.7.2.5 Saving New Values and Exiting Set-up Mode. 2.8 . . . . . .. ... ... . . . . e . . . . . : SetupMenu. . . . .. .. ... Ce 2.8.1 Features1 —4 . . . . . . e e e e e e e e .0 L. 2.8.2 2.8.3 Features 14 — 20 "Other” Protocol (IBM Emulation) . . . . . .. ... ... 2.9 Factory-set Power-on Status 2.10 Self-Tests . . . . . . . . . . ... ... . . . . 2.10.1 Power-Up Self-Test . . . . . . 2.10.2 Printing Self-Test. . . . . . .. e . . . . . . . N ‘. .. ..... Co .. ... e ... e ..... . PART 2 LA75 IN DEC-COMPATIBLE MODE CHAPTER 3 CHARACTER PROCESSING 3.1 3.2 3.3 DEC Conformance Level Introduction . . . . . . . . . . .. Coding Standards. . . . . . . . e e e e Coe e 7-Bit and 8-Bit Environments. . . . . . . e e e e e 3.4 Character Set Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . ... 3.5 Control Characters . . . . . . . .S RIS SRR et 3.5.1 3.5.1.1 3.5.1.2 Backspace(BS) . 3.5.1.3 Horizontal Tab (HT). 3.5.1.4 Line Feed (LF) . . . . . . . ... ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . .. . .. S . . . . . .. DAL S S SR 3.5.1.5 3.5.1.6 Form Feed (FF). 3.5.1.7 3.5.1.9 Carriage Return(CR). . . . . . . . ... ... ..... Shift Out (SO). . . . . . e e e e e e e ShiftIn(SI) . . . . . ... .. ... .. ...... SRR 3.5.1.10 Null(NUL) 3.5.1.8 . . . .. .. . .. A A RN I S AL SRS 3.5.1.11 3.5.1.12 XOFF (DC3) 3.5.1.13 Cancel (CAN) . . . . . . .. o e el e O Escape (ESC) . RPN . . . . . . . U T EE TR 3.5.1.14 3.5.1.15 3.5.2 . . . . . . . .. I SRR S C1 (8-Bit) Text Control Characters . . . . . . . . ... .. 3.56.2.1 Partial Line Down(PLD) . . . 3.5.2.2 Partial Line Up(PLU). 3.5.2.3 IND, NEL. HTS.and VTS . iv CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... . . . .el . .. ... ... .. ... . et TM~ o Single Shift 2(SS2) . . . .. . ... .. ... ... 49 3.5.2.4 3.5.2.5 Single Shift 3(SS3) . . . . . . e U co.. . 49 3.5.2.6 Device Control String (DCS) Introducer. . . . . . . . . 49 = — 3.5.2.8 3.5.2.9 String Terminator (ST) . . . . . .. .. ... ... .. 49 'OSC, PM, and APC . . . . . S R AR .. 49 > 3.6 Printable, Space and Spemal Characters. . . . . .. ... . 49 - 3.7 CharacterCell . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. ........ 50 3.5.2.7 Control Sequence Introducer (CSI) . . . . . . . . .. . 49 CHAPTER 4 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE - 4.1 Escape Sequence, Cmtml Sequence, and Control String Formats . . . . . A PSR R SRRy L 4.1.1 Escape Sequence Format 51 . . . . . . . . SEPSITEEFURTV N 51 4.1.2 Control Sequence Format . . . . .e | 4.1.3 Control String Format. . . . . . .. .. .. ... .... 55 [ 4.1.4 - Error Handling. 4.2 ’m’ 4.2.2 I - 4.2.3 e e 52 . . . . . . . . . .. R oX 7-Bit and 8-Bit Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... 58 4.2.1 B T Converting 7-Bit Control Sequence to Equivalent 8-Bit C1 Control Character . . . . . . . . ... ... .. 58 Cmnvertmg 8-Bit C1 Control Character to Eqmvalem 7-Bit Control Sequence. . . . . . . . . ... ....... 58 ~ . - - ST . 59 4.2.4 4.3 4.3.1 DEC Conformance Levels . . . . . . ... ......... 61 4.4 Level 1 Functions. . . . .. ... ..............864 4.4.1 4.4.2 Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) . . . . . P T 64 Vertical Pitch (DECVERP). . . . . . . . e e e T e e 68 4.4.3 Page Length (DECSLPP) . . . . . . ... .. P 69 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.5.1 - 4.4.5.2 Partial-line Paper Motion (PLD and PLU} ........... Character Set Selection . . . . . . . .. ..SR RV “Select Character Set Sequences (SCS) . . . . . .. .. Single and Locking Shifts . . . . . . .. e e . 4.4.5.3 - i ‘ Converting 8-Bit GR Selection to 7-Bit Equivalent. . . . . AT G e LA C1 Control Character Transmit and Receive. . . . . . . . 60 Level 1 and Level 2 Function Summary .......... 61 Assign User-Preference Supplemental Character 71 71 71 73 4.4.5.4 Set (DECAUPSS). . . . . . .. .. S O 75 ANSI Announcer Sequence . . . . . ... ....... 15 4.4.6 Printing Quality Selection (DECDEN). . . . . ... ... 76 CONTENTS v 4.4.7 4.4.7.1 4.4.7.2 4.4.8 Highlighting Your Printing(SGR) 77 Select Graphic Rendition (SGR) Sequence . . . . . . 17 DEC Private SGR Sequence . . . . . . ... ... ... Automatic Sheet Feeder . . . . . . . . .. . ... . ... 4.4.8.1 Other ASF Control Functions 4.4.8.2 ASF Error Conditions. 4.5 . . . .. ... ... .. 79 80 . . . . . . ... ... .. 80 . . . . . . . . . .. ... .... 81 Level 2 Functions . . . . . . P R e e e e e e e 81 4.5.1 Set Page Width Alignment (DECHPWA). . . .. ... . 81 4.5.2 Set Left and Right Margins (DECSLRM). . . . . . .. .. 84 4.5.3 Horizontal Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... ..... 4.5.3.1 Horizontal Tabulation Set Control Code (HTS). . . . . . 85 85 4.5.3.2 Set Horizontal Tabulation Stops (DECSHTS) . . . . . . 86 4.5.3.3 Horizontal Tabulation Set (DECHTS) . . . . . . . . .. 86 4.5.3.4 Tabulation Clear (TBC). . . . . . . . .. ... .. ... 86 4.5.3.5 Clear All Horizontal Tabs (DECCAHT). . . . . . . . .. 87 4.5.4 Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM). . . . . . . .. 87 4.5.5 Vertical Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... .. .... 4.5.5.1 Vertical Tab Set Control Code (VTS) . . . . . . . . . 90 ..- 91 . . . . ... ... ..... 91 4.5.5.2 Vertical Tab Set (DECVTS). 4.5.5.3 Set Vertical Tab Stops (DECSVTS). . . . .. .. .. .. 91 4.5.5.4 Tabulation Clear (TBC) . . . . . . . . . ... .. .... 91 4.5.5.5 Clears All Vertical Tabs (DECCAVT). . . .. ... ... 92 Active Column and Active Line Commands. . . . . . . .. 92 4.5.6 4.5.6.1 Forward Index Control Code(IND). . . . . . ... . .. 92 4.5.6.2 Next Line Control Code(NEL). . . . . . . ... .. .. 92 4.5.6.3 Autowrap Mode (DECAWM) . . . . . . ... ... ... 93 4.5.6.4 Carriage Return New Line Mode (DECCRNLM) . . . . . 93 4.5.6.5 Linefeed New Line Mode (LNM) . . . . ... .. .. .. 94 4.5.6.6 Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA) . . . . . . ... . 94 4.5.6.7 Horizontal Position Relative (HPR). . . . . . . . .. 94 4.5.6.8 Vertical Position Absolute (VPA) . . . . . .. . ... .. 95 4.5.6.9 Vertical Position Relative(VPR) .. 95 4.5.7 Unidirectional/Bidirectional Printing (DECUPM). . . . . . 95 4.5.8 Downline-Loadable Character Set. . . . . . .. ... . .. 96 . . . . . . . .. .. .. 4.5.8.1 Designinga CharacterSet . . . . . .. ... ...... 96 4.5.8.2 DECDLD Control String . . . . . . ... ... ..... 4.5.8.3 Example of DECDLD Control String. 98 103 . . . . .. . . .. SO CHAPTER 5 STATUS, REPORT AND RESET SEQUENCES 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.4 5.5 5.6 IBM Proprinter Emulation Mode (DECIPEM) . . . . . . .. 105 Set Conformance Level (DECSCL) . . . . . . . .. .. ... 106 Product Identlficatwn Device Attributes (DA) Sequanms ............................ Primary Device Attributes . . . . . . e e e e e Secondary Device Attributes . . . . . . . ... ... ... Device Status Request (DSR) . . . . . . . .. ... ... .. Device Status Report (DSR). . . . . . ... .. ... ... . Reset to Initial State(RIS) . . . . . . ... ... ... ... 5.7 Soft Terminal Reset (DE: 5.8 Loading Factory Nonvolatile Memory (NVR) Settings (DECFNVR) . . . . . . ... ... ......... 107 107 108 109 110 112 112 CHAPTER 6 GRAPHIC MODE 6.1 OVEervIeW. . . . . v v o o e v e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 115 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.2.1 Selecting Graphic Mode: The Sixel Protocol . . . . . . . .. String Introducer . . . . . . ... .. .. VRO T Protocol Selector . . . . . . . . .. P 116 116 © Macro Parameter (Ps1). . . . . . . ... .. ... ... 117 6.2.2.3 6.2.2.4 6.2.2.5 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.3 Horizontal Grid Size (Ps3) . . . . . . . Additional Parameters (Ps?) . . . . . . Final Character(q) . . . . . . . . . . . PictureData. . . . . . . . .. ... ... String Terminator (STD. IR Sk A IR Character Processingin GraphicMode . . . 6.2.2.2 . e 117 Background Select (Ps2) . . . . . ... e e STV ... ... ... .. ... ... RENCE S T D . . . . . .. .. 117 119 119 119 119 120 6.3.2.1 6.3.2.2 6.3.2.3 6.3.2.4 Repeat Introducer (!) and Sequence. . . . . . . . . . .. Set Raster Attributes Sequence . . . . . . . . .. L. Graphic Carriage Return($) . . . . .. ... ... ... Graphic New Line (-) . . . . ... . . ... ... ... 121 122 125 125 6.3.2.6 Parameter Separator ;). 125 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.2.5 Sixel Printable Characters . . . . . .. ... ... .... 120 SixelControlCodes. . . . . . . . ... ... ...... 121 Numeric Parameters (0—9). . . . . . . ... . ... .. 125 . . . . .R A O 6.3.3 Graphic CO Control Characters. . . . . . . ... 6.3.4 Graphic Substitute (SUB) Character . . . ... .. 126 . . . . . ... . 126 6.3.5 Leaving GraphicMode . . . . . .. .. ... .. .. ... 126 6.3.6 Printer State After Leaving Graphlc Mode . . . .. 127 . ... — e PART 3 LA75 IN IBM PROPRINTER EMULATION MODE m CHAPTER 7 IBM EMULATION FEATURES 7.1 General . . . . . . . ... ... .. ... TR A 7.1.1 Line-Oriented Buffer and Lme 'I‘ermmamrs. 53w 7.1.2 Graphic Mode Overview. 131 - adh . 132 . . . . . . . . . ... .. .... 133 - and CharacterSets . . . . . . .. ... ..... Co.oo.o.. 133 e 7.1.4 Character Size. 133 7.1.5 Standard. Compressed. and Doublewwmth Printing . . . . 133 Escape Sequence Processing . . . . . . .... 7.1.3 7.1.6 7.2 Compatible Control Characters, Escape Sequenc&s, Character Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. 7.2.1 Character Set Charts . . . . . 7.2.2 Control Characters . . . . . 7.2.3 Special Characters . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... 134 LI PR T 134 . ... ... ......... ... ... ... ..... 141 144 . . o 134 .. ... . .SIS PN | - - CHAPTER 8 ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR [BM EMULATION 8.1 General 8.2 Terminal Management . . . . . .. ... .......... . . . . .. ... ....... Celd he i ST Reset to Initial State (RIS) . . 8.2.2 Soft Terminal Reset (STR) . . . . . . .. ......... 146 - 8.2.3 8.2.4 IBM Terminal Reset . . . . . ... .. ......... . Deselect Printer. . . . . . . . .. ... .... ...... 146 146 W 8.3 . .. ce ... . 145 8.2.1 8.2.5 . . . . . 145 146 IBM Proprinter Emulation Mode (DECIPEM) ....... 146 Vertical Form Handling. . . . . . . . .el e 8.3.1 Set Vertical Pitch(ERSLI) . . . ... . .. et oL 8.3.2 Set Vertical Pitch (ERIOLL). . . . . . . . ... 8.3.3 Set Vertical Pitch (ERNLI2) . . .. .. .. ... .. . .. 148 8.3.4 Set Vertical Pitch (ERNLI1) . . ... .. .. v w . ... 148 8.3.5 Set Vertical Pitch (ERNLI3) . . . .. ... .. .. ... . 148 8.3.6 Set Vertical Pitch (ERNLI4) . . . . . ... 148 8.3.7 Set Form Length (ERSFL) . . . . . . . ... .. L. 149 . . . . . .. .. ... ... . 149 8.3.8 Set Form Length (ERSFLI). 8.3.9 Set Bottom margin (ERSBM). viii CONTENTS . . . . e ... ... . . .. o .. . ... .. e ... .. ... 147 147 148 149 4 Clear Bottom Margin(ERCBM). . . . . . . .. ... ... Set Vertical Tabs . . . . . . . . . .. e e e e e e e ... .. e e e Set TopOf Form . . ... ...... T Enable/Disable Automatm Line Fe&d G R e S it e e e e R e Horizontal Form Handling . . . . . . e ... .. ... . . . . . Return. Carriage Print Width and 149 180 150 8.4.1.3 Set Double-Width Characters (EREDW) . . . . . . . . . Set Single-Width Characters (ERDDW) . . . . . . . . . L reTe e e . IR Carriage Return (PCR1). . . . . . T 151 151 151 8.4.2 Horizontal Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... .. : 8.3.10 8.3.11 8.3.13 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.1.1 8.4.2.1 8.4.2.2 8.4.3 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.7 8.7.1 8.7.2 Set Horizontal Tabs (ERSHT e Set All Horizontal Tabs. . . . . .. .. ... ke Set Horizontal Spacingto 12CPI. . . . . . . . ce e, Paper Fault Handling . . . . . . .. ... ... .. ..... Disable Paper Out (ERDP Enable Paper Out (EHEPO). m SRS ‘ e e 150 150 181 152 182 152 | e ev e, . 183 Alternate Character Set Mappmg .......... Ce Select Set A(ERCO1). . . . ... ... AR A S S A Select Set B(ERC02) . . . . . . .. .. e e e e e e 154 154 154 Umdxmctmnallmxdlrectlmal Prmtmg mntml e e e e 153 SetBidirectional Printing (ERDUD) ( Set Unidirectional Printing 8.7.3 Select All Characters Set . . . . . L L 164 8.7.4 Print Single Character From All Chamcter Set ,,,,,, . 155 8.8 Ui Printing Modes LU | 8.8.1 Draft Printing 8.8.2 LQPrinting. . . . . . . . . ... oo ‘ NLQ Printing 8.8.3 8.8.4 8.8.4.1 8.8.4.2 8.8.4.3 8.8.5 8.8.6.3 8.8.6.4 8.8.6.5 Shadow Bold Printing Shadow Bolded lmft , , | ‘ Shadow Bolded NLQ . . . . . . . . .. Coe e ... . Shadow Bolded LQ . . . . . . RN L S AN AR S S Superscript and Subscript. . . . . ... 0oL L. . . .. 156 156 156 Enable Shadow Bold (EREBD). . . . . . . ... .. .. Disable Shadow Bold (ERDBD). . . . . . . . .. . ... Set Letter Quality/NLQ Printing (EREHR) . . . . . . . Set Draft (ERDHR). . . . . . . . ... .. .. ... .. Select Print Quality. . . . . . . i e e e e e e e e 156 156 156 1587 157 Selecting Printing Modes . . . . . I &1 8.8.6.6 Set/Reset Underline (EREUL) . . 8.8.6.7 Set/Reset Overscore 8.8.6.8 8.8.6.9 8.9 8.10 8.10.1 . . . .. . . ... .. ... .. .. .. .. AR ‘ Enable Superscript/Subscript (ERESCR) ......... Reset Script (ERDSCR). . . . .. ... . e Printing Mode Rules and Exceptmm ..... A GraphicMode . . . . . . . .. .. ... ... ... ... . Escape K (480 Bit-Image Graphic Mode) . . . . . . . Escape L (960 Bit-Image Graphic Mode) . . . . . . . Escape Y (960 Bit-Image Graphic Mode — Normal 8.10.2 8.10.3 Speed). 8.10.4 . . . . . . . . .. ... Escape Z (1920 Bit-Image Graphic Mode). . . . . . . . . Downline-Load Character Image to Mammry ......... 8.11 APPENDIX A CHARACTER SETS APPENDIX B DEC GRAPHIC MODE — IMAGE EXAMPLES APPENDIX C TEXT MODE PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES APPENDIX D ALTERNATIVE PROGRAMMING METHODS FIGURES | 2-1 EIA MMJ Serial Interface Connector. 2-2 Serial Character Format (Printer-to-Computer). . . 2-3 Serial Character Format (Computer-to-Printer). . . 2-4 LA75 Companion Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. . . . . . $ . . et . E 2-5 LA75 Set-upMenu . . . .. 2-6 Printing Self-test . . . 3-1 7-Bit U.S. ASCII CharacterSet. 3-2 8-Bit DEC Multinational Character Set. . . . . . .. .. . 8-Bit ISO Multinational Character Set . . . . . . .S Designating and Mapping Character Sets (8-Bit 3-3 3-4 | Environment) . . . . . . . . .. ... ... .... PRI .. .. . ... ... . . . . . v e el . ... ...LR .., 3-5 Designating and Mappmg Character Sets (7-Bit 4-1 Horizontal Pitch Selections . . . . . 4-2 Changing Horizontal Pitch . . . . .. 4-3 Vertical Pitch Selections. . . . . .. .. T Environment) . . . . . . . . Coe e T . . T .. .. ... ... B P e s . L B _ 4-4 - 4-5 4-6 - 49 Character A in Sixel Pattern . . . . . . ... ...... .. 97 6-1 7-1 IBM Graphic Character Set A (GR) (Sheet 20f2). . . . . . . 136 o 7-2 7-2 7-3 - - o - - p ] . om f ) o~ = S A 96 Pixel Pattern for Character A. . . . . . . . e Column Codes for Example 80-Column Font ”A" e Character . . . . . . P eieaie Sixel Pattern . . . . . . . . ... ... 7-1 o TM ‘ ‘Top/Bottom Margma and Pitches . . . . . .. ... et. 90 . ~ Print Area and Horizontal Settings . . . . . v es ... . 83 Form Length and Vertical Setting: 4-7 4-8 4-10 TM Print Quality Examples . . . . . . ... .. ... ... ... 77 7-3 Al A-2 A-3 A-4 IBM Graphic Character Set A (GL) (Sh%t 1 flf 2). . ..... 104 115 135 IBM Graphic Character Set B (GL) (Sheet 1 0of2). . . . . . . 137 IBM Graphic Character Set B (GR) (Sheet 20f 2). . . . . . . 138 .. .. 139 ~ IBM All Character Set (GL)(Sheet 10f2) . . . ... IBM All Character Set (GR) (Sheet 20f2) . . . . . . .. .. U.S. ASCII Character Set. . . . . .. ... .. e e United Kingdom Character Set . . . . . . . ot v E e 140 ... . lb4 e . . 165 Dutch Character Set . . . . .. ... ... e 166 Finnish CharacterSet. . . . . . . . . ... ... ...... 167 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 French Character Set . . . . . . . . ... ... ... . ... 168 French Canadian Character Set. . . . . . . . . .. ... .. 169 German Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... .... 170 [talian Character Set . . . . . . . .. ee 171 Japanese (JIS Roman) Character Set . . . . . . .. ... .. 172 Katakana Character Set. . . . . . .. .. ... ... .... 173 DEC Norwegian/Danish Character Set . . . . . . . Ce 174 A-18 A-19 A-20 DEC Technical CharacterSet. . . . . . .. ... .. .... 181 VT100 Line Drawing Character Set. . . . . . . e e 182 ISO Supplemental Character Set . . . . . . . .. ... . . . 183 A-16 A-17 ISO Norwegian/Danish Character Set. . . . . . . . . .. .. Portuguese Character Set. . . . . . .. ... . ... ... . C e e Spanish Character Set . . . . . .. ... 175 176 177 DEC Supplemental Character Set. . . . . e e e 178 Swedish Character Set . . . . . . e e e 179 Swiss Character Set. . . . . . . . ... R 180 CONTENTS xi TABLES 2-1 Interface Signals . . . . ... ... ..... e .. LA75 Features, Values and Factory Settmgs RN I .. 2-2 2-3 ~ PowerOnStatus . . ... ... ... ..... MRS .. 15 28 33 3-1 CO (7-Bit) Text Mode Control Characters. e ... 45 . 48 3-2 C1 (8-Bit) Text Mode Control Chameters, 3-3 Character Generation . . 4-1 Control Strings . . . . . ... .. 4-2 Control Function Equivalents . . 4-3 Level 1 and 2 Functions. . . . . . . .. . e . ... ... ... e .. ..., e e . . . . . R 1 . .. . .. LR ... 62 .. PR T2 . . . . e 4-4 Page Length and Vertical Pitch . . . . . S PR ... 4-5 Assigning Character Sets. . . . . . .. 70 A L. 4-6 Fallback Escape Sequences . . . . . . .. AR 4-7 Selecting an Active Character Set. . . . . . . . . e ... . . . 7-1 Character Sizes Vs. Print Density. 7-2 Summary of Control Characters. B-1 Selectable Image Scale Sizes and Aspect Ratios xii CONTENTS . . . . . . . . ... 50 56 R 73 .. 74 ... ... . . . . . . . 134 141 185 This manual mntams reference information for users with program e ience. Programmers can use this information to design or modxfy applwatmu software to take advantage of the femumfl available m the prmmr Your applxcamm software determmes the abmty to select the printer functions you desire and the extent to which you can use them. For example. word pro- cessing applications should have menus that let you select bold. underline. margins. tabs, and mlabed features fm thme a_&phcatmns This manual d«ms not explmn how to use these applwatmn»apemfic menus, send the mntml seque nces fmm a ,_;rtwular lmst computer, or run a given operating system or applwatmn package. This manual contains interface, co e,;,;.mumcatmm character processing. and es- cape and control sequence information. Appendix C contains several examples of how to use the control functi this manual. The sample programs are written in a generic version of BASIC. They may reqmre modmfxcatmn for operatmg systems or apphcatmm that use other versions of "‘BASIC OTHER LA75 MANUALS Your printer comes with one other manual. Installing and Using the LA75 Companion Prmtw which describes how to install. operate. and maintain the printer. MANUAL ORGANIZATION This manual has eight chapters and four appendices that cover the following topics. PART 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Chapter 1 gives an overview of the printer and its features. Chapter 2 describes how the LA75 communicates with a computer. This chapter describes the printer’s serial interface, communication signals, configuration (set-up)menu, and required data format. It also contains a description of operator controls and indicators. PART 2 LA75 IN DEC-COMPATIBLE MODE Chapter 3 describes how the LA75 processes received text mode characters. Chapter 4 describes text mode escape and control gequences to select prmtmg functions. Chapter 5 describes the status and reset features of the printer. Chapter 6 describes the processing of graphic mode comml and prmtable characters. PART 3 LA75 IN IBM PROPRINTER EMULATION‘MODE Chapter 7 glves an overview of the Proprinter Emulation mode. It describes the set-up menu features. text mode characterprmessmg, and IBM characters sets. | Chapter 8 describes text and graphic mode escape and contml sequences used to select IBM-compatible functions. Appendix A shows the character sets used with the LA75 in DECmnmpatmble environment. Appendmx B shows examples of vertical grid size and image scale size; and the relationship between image scale size and aspect ratio. Appendix C contains several BASIC programming examples that use the commands defined in Chapter 4. Appendix D contains alternative programming methods that help to improve print quality. 2 INTRODUCTION ¢ WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES The warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual have specific purposes. o WARNINGS | =TM Contain important information relating to personal safety. CAUTIONS o Contain information to prevent damage to the equipment. NOTES Contain general information. T b4 i S CHAPTER 1 FEATURES .. e . . . ... e e e e e e e e e ' PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND .. . SELF-TESTS. . . . . . . . . . Fol 1.1 GENERAL The LA? 5 Compamonis a compact dot matrix printer. It is demgned fmr use in ‘ person:al computer systems, ¢ affm& Wwor: jI eamtmm,. and small-sized business com- puter systems. | The LA75 receives characters and commands through an a&ynahmmus serial interface. The interface operates at any of several selectablebaudmbes up to baud. Theprmtm hafi a 2 Kbyte mput buffer. The prmth@ad mmnw on a camme that scans horizontally across the paper The printer is capable of bidirectional printing to optimize printer throughput. The ribbonis m a disposable cartn%# . The LA? 5 prm r has a pm;?_;,mlmlction feature that allows the printer to ,_'mte m mther DEC or IIM nter Emulatmn mades | In the DEC mode (Part 2), the printer can perform as a LA50 or LA210 printer. This means that the LA75 is mmme»dmtely compatible with most operating systems and apphcatmm written to support these printers. In the IBM Pmprmter mode (Part 3), the LA75 emulates the IEM Proprinter, allowing you torun “off the shelf” industry-standard software applications written to support the IBM Proprinter. You can select DEC or IBM Proprinter modes using the protocol switch on the front panel, a set-up menu. or by sending the appropriate control sequence to the printer. The printer has two fundamental printing modes — text mode and graphic mode. It also provides downline-loading of a character set. 1.1.1 Text Mode ’ In the text mode. the printer uses a 9-element impact dot matrix printhead to print Courier style characters at speeds from 32 to 250 characters per second. Line length on 8-inch paper can be from 40 to 137 characters per line. T"f"éfe LA75 has four print densities that can be selected through software con- trol. You can also select the Near Letter Quality (NLQ) and Letter Quality (LQ) pm{*fi;,,tzngusing theprint quahty switch on the front panel or through the set-up menu. (See Sections 2.7 and 2.8.) Faster Draft and Memo printing are selec- table through the set-up menu. You can print from many different character sets (including 20 built-in DEC character sets and 3 built-in IBM sets) to select different languages and linedrawing or scientific characters. 1.1.2 Graphic Mode In the graphic mode, the LA75 lets the user prmt graphm images by sendmg data that controls the dot printing elements individually. , In DEC graphic mode, the LA75 is capable of printing bitmap data in accor- dance with the sixel graphic protocol. You can choose different combinations of graphic (dot) densities. aspect ratios. and image scale sizes. Each printable characteris printed out of 64 possible 1 x 6 dot combinations. The LA75 provides several graphic print densities with up m 180 dots/mr:h horzmntally and 144 dots/inch vertically. IBM graphic modeis described in Part 3 of this manual. IBM grapmc mode provides the bit-image (dot) resolution up to 240 dots/inch h«:mmntally and 72 dots/inch vertically. Bit-image graphics print using eight of nine printheadwires (bottomwire is not used). ¢y 1.1.3 Downline-Loadable Memory The printer has memory space allocated to store up to 96 user-defined, downhne~loaded draft characters that can be used as an actwe chamcter set. 8 FEATURES 1.1.4 Optiorm The LA75 prmer supportfi two options — LA7 SXWSF sheet feeder and LA75 font cartridges. For more information on the sheet feeder. see Paragraph 4.4.8 and ”Installingand Using the LA75-SF Smglw’[‘ray Feeder” (EK-LA75X-UG). For more mformatmx on t:he f(mtcartridges, see an appropriate user manual 1.1.5 LA75 Features o © Downline-loadable characters 6 Katakana character set for Japan Graphic printing ©6 © Digital Technical character set Fnur print densities — clraft memo, NLQ, and LQ e Digital and ISO Multinational md Supplemamtal character sets o Compact size suita .;»@ fw dmk-«mp lmatmn Digital and IBM compatibilit; ASCII and natmnal ch ;:agtar sets VT100 special graphic character set ¢ & o o o Some of the main features of the LA? 5 rim:er are as follows. ngh reliability Bold, italics, supersmmpt and subficmpt 1.2 SPECIFICATIONS The following are the specification: for the LA75 printer. Print method | T ~ Print speed Incremental with bidirectional kel ch ’irracterslsemnd draft — memo 125 characters/second haracters/second — near letter NQMalmty | 32 chamctera/ semnd letter quality Character format (dots) B 9 x. 9star dard 11 x 12 fullin draft 18 x 9 std., 22 x 12 fullin memo 17 x 17 std., 21 x 23 fullin NLQ 27 x 18 std., 35 x 24 full in LQ Graphic mode DEC mode — up to 180 dots/inch horizontally and 144 dots/inch vertmally | 1tol, Zmlmz1/2t01a$pe«::t o ratms IBM mod& — up to 240 dmtsfmch horizontally and 72 dots/inch vertically Characters DEC mode — 94 ASCII 96 Multinational 63 JIS Katakana 27 VT100 special graphic 85 Technical (scientific) g'raphm 1 error indicator IBM mode — 3 o | Sets A, B, and All Charactem Character pitch Pica pitch — 10 chamcterslmch 80 characters/line Double width — 5 chamcters/mch 40 characters/line Elite pitch — 12 charactem/mch 96 characters/line Double width — 6 cham&éré/imm 48 characters/line Compressed font — 17.1 characters/inch, 137 characters/line Double width — 8.55 characters/inch, 68 characters/line DEC-only compressed font — 16.5 chararacter/inch, 132 char/line DEC-only double width — 8.25 character/inch, 66 char/line - Character highlighting -~ ' Underlining | Double underlining (DEC only) Bolding Italics - Superscript and subscript o~ Overscoring Line spacing 12,8,6,4.3, or 2 lines/inch Partial line up and down, 1/12 inch 600 ms/inch Form dimensions Form thickness | Paper feed method '” Single sheets: 3 to 9 inches wide | Up to 0.011 inches, up to 3-part form Friction feed and tractor feed from rear and tractor feed from bottom Optional automatic sheet feeder Form loading Single sheets from rear-top Continuous forms from bottom: use bottom feed when printing envelopes. labels. and multi-part forms. Continuous forms from rear; use rear feed when printing on single-ply paper. Ribbon cartridge Operator installable Power requirements LA75-A5 100 Vac, 50/60 Hz LA75-A2 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz LA75-A3 240 Vac. 50/60 Hz LA75-A4 220 Vac. 50/60 Hz Power consumption Less than 180 W Weight 9.5 Kg (20 Ib) Dimensions 427 mm (W) x 345 mm (D) x 121 mm (H) (16.81in x 13.6in x 4.75 in) | Data interface | Serial RS423 and RS232-C (with an adaptor) EIA Standard 2 Kbyte input buffer FEATURES 11 e iter system, prwming hardcopy output ests blish a comter, you must mumcatmn link between t*;fl prmter and the mmpumr Th&communication link you must pmvxdeis a serial data interface. For hard ;i;am interface requirements, see Installing and 'f""?ffvmngthe LA75 Companion Printer. The following sections describe these communication characteristics. EIA serial interface connector and interface signals Baud rates Data character format Data buf’fe;ing requirements 2.2 EIAINTERFACE CONNECTOR LA75 interface signals meet EIA (Electronic Industry Association) standards RS423, RS449, and RS232-C. The EIA interface connector is the MMJ 6-pin female connector that mounts on the back of the printer. Figure 2-1 shows the EIA connector and pin numbers. 1 MA-D141-8B6A Figure 2-1 EIA MMJ Serial Interface Connector 14 PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS 2.3 INTERFACE SIGNALS Table 2-1 shows pin assignments in the I IMJ connector for the interface signals. Ta I@ 2-1 Interface Signa Name Function From printer TR TerminalReady SO U e W Direction - RS232-C Pin From printer From printer To printer SD | ~ To printer Send Data " Name CD = | Send Common Receive Common Receive Data ~ Data Set Ready BA | ., BB CC The following paragraphs describe l.mdual signals. 2.3.1 Send Common This line is the common ground reference potential for the Send Dma and Terminal Ready interface circuits. | ve Common This line is the common ground reference potential for the Receive Data and Data Set Ready interface circuits. 2.3.3 Receive Data - The printer receives serial encoded characters from the computer on this line. 2.3.4 Send Data The printer senfids serial encoded characters to the computer on this line. The bit rate within a character can be up to 9600 bits per second. However. the character transmission rate from the printer to the computer over any 2 characters does not exceed 100 characters per second. These limits ensure that two stop bits are always sent to the computer at baud rates above 1200 baud. 2.3.5 Terminal Ready The printer uses this line to tell the computer when the printer is ready ta send and receive data. | The ON condition indicates the printer is ready to send and recewe data The OFF condition indicates that the printer is not ready. After the power-up initialization. the printer is ready to send and receive data. The printer remains ready to communicate indefinitely. 2.3.6 Data Set Ready The LA75 does not use this line. 2.4 DATA FORMAT The LA75 requires data transmission in a bit serial. asynchronous character format. This format consists of a start bit (space), 7 or 8 data bits (1 = mark, 0 = space). a selectable parity bit., and at least 1 stop bit (mark). You select the number of data bits and parity through the set-up menu (Section 2.8). The LA75 must use the same data bits and parity as your computer.. Figures 2-2 and 2-3 show the printer-to-computer and computer to-printer char- acter formats. 16 PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS VARIABLE IDLE TIME | (DEPENDS ON TRAFFIC) IDLE TEOF | , | 70R8 'DATABITS SPACE + . 28BITS (MINIMUM GUARANTEED ~ | IDLETIME) . START BIT OF NEW CHARACTER B ,wimlmlmamwaawI g “MARK" k& s ]' ONE BIT OPTIONAL OPTIONAL RETURN TO IDLE BAUD RATE BIT 8th BIT “g‘,fg; PARITY STATEOF LINE MA-7815-C VARIABLE IDLE TIME (DEPENDS ON TRAFFIC) IDLE STATE OF , LINE 1BIT Minmum IDLE TIME) DATABITS ‘ NEW CHARACTER ...ak SPACE + : LfiB B | ‘GUARANTEED | START BIT OF 70R8 'srlm BIT lmlmnmlm@%imlwafi, mwfi BIT TIME = ONE/ BAUD RATE | OPTIONAL OPTIONAL RETURN 10 IDLE 8th BIT PARITY BIT STATE OF LINE MA-TB15-8 Figure 2-3 Serial Character Format (Computer-to-Printer The printer sends 2 stop bits between characters to the computer. Stop bits provide a minimum idle time between two characters. The printer communicates with equipment that requires 1 or 2 stop bits. The data bits define 7- or 8-bit characters with the least significant bit leading. Parity is set together with a number of data bits in the set-up menu. In a 7-bit environment, you can select even. odd. mark, or space parity. In an 8-bit environment, you can select even, odd. or no parity. To enable pamty error detec»- tion. you must select even or odd parity. / , , 2.5 BAUD RATES Baud rate is the speed at which data is sent and re(jeived, usually expressed in bits per second. The LA75 must use the same baud rate as your computer. You can select a printer baud rate of 110, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800. or 9600 bits per second. You select the baud rate through the set-up menu (Section 2.8). 2.6 INPUT BUFFER CONTROL The LA75 monitors incoming data to avoid input buffer overflow. The printer uses the XON/XOFF protocol for buffer control. 2.6.1 XON/XOFF Protocol The LA75 uses the XON/XOFF protocol for, input buffer contml. After the printer is turned on and ready to receive data, it sends an XON con- trol character to the computer. The XON character tells the computer to start sending data. To avoid input buffer overflow. the printer constantly monitors the number of empty character positions in the input buffer. When the input buffer fills to 1920 (of 2048 maximum) characters, the printer sends an XOFF control character. This first XOFF character tells the computer to stop sending data. If the computer misses the first XOFF character, the printer sends a second XOFF control character when the input buffer fills to 1984 characters. Meanwhile. the printer continues to print or process characters from the input buffer. When the input buffer drops to 1792 characters. the printer sends an XON character. telling the computer to resume sending data. | If ym.x mpen thflprmter s mcms mvw or run cmt ufandurmg prmtmg the the prmter s&m&s an XON chamcmr only’ when the mput: buffer faiw belaw | 1 792 a:hamcwm The printer tem;mraxily stores allreceived characters in its input buffer before processing. The| input buffer can hold 2048 i(2 Kbyte) diits stmiati bons it characters et et withouty losing B As the printer is processing data from the input buffer, it moves characters into the pmlt buffer The LA75 does not start printing until one of the following conditions are met: \ 2. line terminator character (LF, FF, VT CR) is received (Section In Text mode, the Autowrap feature is set and printing occurs be- yond the right margin. 3. In Text mode, the printer has not recewed data for 500 | 4, | milliseconds. In Graphic mode, the printer has not received data for the last 3 seconds. If the printer receives characters faster than it can process or print them, the input buffer may overflow. The LA75 uses the XON/XOFF protocol to avoid the input buffer overflow. If, however, the host computer ignores the XON/ XOFF protocol, data may be lost. The printer replaces each lost character with a substitute (SUB) control character. The printer inserts the SUB character in the input buffer at the point of loss. SUB prints as an error character (reverse question mark). The printer uses the same method to replace characters received with a parity or framing error. Unlike all other DEC-made control codes and sequences, the Device Status Request (DSR) control sequence is processed out of sequence and as soon as it is received (Sections 5.3 and 5.4). The printer immediately responds to the DSR without placing it into the buffer, even when the buffer is full and an XOFF has been sent to the host computer. ' COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS 19 2.7 FRONT PANEL CONTROLS AND OPERATING MODES At power up the LA75 can be placed in one of two operating modes — Pmnt or Set-up. Each switch on the LA75 control panel has two functions, one for each of these operating modes. 2 In Print mode. the control panel switches perform the functions that appear in white letters above the switch. In Set-up mode, the control switches perform the functions that appear in dark grey letters below the switches. The two indicators for Power and Fault operate in all modes. Figure 2-4 shows the front control panel of the printer. Protocol Power Fault - - | 3 DEC L) Set-up D3 0ther Print Quality L) Feature Ready caLa onNwel Line Feed Form Feed D o D . ) —J J Value Next | Previous MA-0139-86 Figure 2-4 LA75 Companion Control Panel 20 PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS 2.7.1 Print M de Controls and Operation In Print mode, t e prmter receives mput data frmm the host computer and prints the data.T his mode aperatmn dfipends on the mtwup features stored in the printer’s memory 2.7.1.1 Print ;Mmda ControlsandIndicators- These controls are as follows. 1, ‘The IP()WERis a green mdmatur that lxghts when the printer is po- 2. TheFAULTis a red indicator. The FAULT indicator lights and | wered up. st:ays on when the paper supply is out or a prmthfimdposition error is demted The FAULT mdmawr blinks continuously when a hardware error is detected during the self-test (Section 5.9). 3. The PROTOCOL switch allows you to connect the LA? 5 to a different hmt computer.To ahange between DEC md OTHER protocols, pmss the switch once and the corresponding indicator will hght NOTE: Use "OTHER" when you want the LA75 to emulate tiw IBM Pmprmter 4. The PRINT QUALI’TY switch allows you to force one of two print densities (LQ or NLQ) regardless of software selection. LQ stands for Letter Quality(32 cps); and NLQstands for Near LetterQuality (42 cps). There are two indicators (LQ and NLQ) that light up at the print quality that you have selected. If both indicators are out, the software is in control of print quality selections. - NOTE: At power up, both indicators are off. and the print quality is controlled by the printer’s set-up memory and software. The LA75 has two otherprintqualities:memo quality (125 cps) and draft quahty (250 cps) thatcan be selected thmugh the set-up menu and snftwam 5. The READY indicator shows if the printer is “on line” or "off line” with the host computer. When the READY indicator is lit, the printer is on-line and will print mcc:mm,g data from the host computer. When the indicatoris off, the printer is off-line and will not print data. If you press the READY switch while the printer is printing (putting it “off line”), the printer completes only the line it is currently print- ing and then stops. If the printer runs out of paper, the FAULT indicator lights. You can press the READY switch to print one line at a time at the bottom of the page. If the access cover is open, the prmter is off-line (READY indicator is off). After you close the cover, press the READ’Y switch to put the printer on-line. 6. The LINE FEED switch advances the paper in the printer one line at a time. Holding the switch down will advance the paper a number of lines. 7. FORM FEED advances the paper in the minter by one form length | at a time. NOTE: The READY switch remains active while the printer is printing. The LINE FEED, FORM FEED, and PRINT QUALITY switches are active only when there is no error condition and the printer is idle; that is, the printer is off-line or there is no data in the input buffer. The PROTOCOL switch is only active when there is no data in the input buffer. 2.7.1.2 Usmg Print Mode - To run the LA75 in the P’rint mode,n proceed as follows. | 1. Set the power switch to 1 (on). 2. Load the paper now or anytime during operation. 3. ~ | The green POWER indicator will light. The READY indicatoris lit to indicate that the printer is on-line with paper loaded and the cover closed. 4. Choose the protocol, if necessary. The indicator next to your choice will light. NOTE: The PROTOCOL switch does not work if the printer is off-line and there is data in the input buffer. i hoase the printquality. Use the PRINT QUALITY switch if you want m change fmm the software-set prmm quahty or rxfyou want to prmtmg The mdwawr néxt to ym;tr choice will hght You ;am now ready to print. NOTE: If you pmgs this switch, you force print quahty seleatwn and software Mimtwn is dmablm me mm @nmr t,hae Smwup modffl; 1: cha,,] e the op&mt'fi g feat res of th The controls aw shown on the front pmrml in dark gmy You enter the Set-up mode at power up while pressing the SET-UP switch. The printer then automatically prints out the current printer settings and sets itself to the Feature Select state. NOTE: On the set-up menu, "DEC" indicates DEC protocol features, and * "Emulation” mdwam IBM Pr&pmntw featums The FEATURE gwntch almws you to move between two select states (Paragraph 2.7.2.1), selecting set-up femums The VALUE switch allows you to get into value wlect state and to aelect or change the feature’s value. The NEXT switch lists and steps through the next feature or value when you are setting your printer’s configuration. Each time you press NEXT, the printer advances one feature or value, de, nding on which select state the printer is in. ~ The PREVIOUS switch goes back one feature or value when you are setting your printer’s configuration. Each time you press PREVIOUS, the printer steps back one feature or value, depending on which select state the printer is in. 2.7.2.1 Select States - There are two select states in the Set-up mode: Feature Select and Value Select. In the Feature Select state you can step through the list of printer features, and see what value is presently stored in the printer’s memory. Feature Select is accessed through the FEATURE switch. In the Value Seiect state you can step through the list of values for each feature until you find the one you want to store in the printer’s memory. Value Select is accessed through the VALUE switch. 2.7.2.2 "Emfimrm'g Smuup Mode - To enter this mode, prt:vc%’d as follows. NOTE Make sure tlm power swzmh is set to the m’f pamtwn and that paper is loaded in the printer. 1. | Press and hold the SET-UP switch while you set the power switch to 1 (on). 2. The green Power indicator lights. The indicator next to OTHER on the PROTOCOL switch starts flashing and continues to flash throughout the set-up procedure to indicate thatthe printer is in the set-up mode. The lower(NLQ) indicator on the FEATURE switch will also begin flashing to indicate that the printer is in the Feature Select state. 3. The printer will automatically (Figure 2-5): | e print a firmware version number, * print a list of the features and values stored in the printer, e print out the first feature in the list (Baud Rate).. and its value, and e 24 | ' ' advance the paper five times. PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS LATE -8 Code Version 1.0 Value Feature U.8. 1 DEC WM 11 1 W DEC s 1 2 Protocol Form U 4800 B-None Character Set o and Farity 7 Supplemental Character N Bits T Data Print Density (DEC) O Baud Rate PFrinter ¢ 1 Text Mode Aute LF on CR [DEC) 2 ND Auto LF Auto CR on LF (DEL) 2 NO Auto 1 Cancel Control Functions (DEC) 1 80 {(Emulation) 2 Un Length ID (DELD) or Right 132 Margin Columns Faper Out Bell Slashed Lero Auto LF on CR Active Aute CR 19 FPower-up 20 L on or NLO LF (DEC) (DEC) (Emulation) (Emulation) Character i8 4 (DEC) (DEC) CaM Control Code 80 Bet Set (Emulation) (Emulation) Density (Emulation) (Emulation) Baud Rate inches ASBCLI Supplemental 1 Draft i LASO 1 Truncate ID CR Columns 2 Zevo 2 HNo without 1 Graphics 2 Mo auto slash LF set A auto CR 1 Dratt 1 SBelect 7 ABOD NLD A0 T0-86 Figure 2-5 LA75 Set-up Menu F 2.7.2.3 Changing Set-up Parameters - Once the printer is in the Feature Select state, there are two choices. If you want to keep the value for the first teature listed, and review the next feature, press NEXT. The printer prints the — next feature and its value, and advances another 5 lines. If you want to change the value for the first, or any other feature listed, you must enter the Value Select state. and proceed as follows. 1. Press the VALUE switch. — NOTE: The indicator on the VALUFE switch will begin to flash: the indicator on the FEATURE switch will stop flashing. 2. Press NEXT or PREVIOUS to step through the value options for a feature. After you step through the last value, the list begins again with the first value. NOTE: Each time you press NEXT or PREVIOUS, a new value is selected and printed, and the paper then advances 5 lines. If you press NEXT or PREVIOUS continuously, the LA75 prints values one line at a time. When you stop pressing the switch, the paper is advanced 5 lines. S 3. Stop at the value you want to select. It will be saved and made ac- tive when you leave the Set-up mode later. Now you can return to the Feature Select state by pressing the FEATURE switch to list the next feature and its value. 2.7.2.4 Re-entering the Feature Select State - After changing the value setting(s). you can return the printer to the Feature Select state as follows. 1. Press the FEATURE switch to re-enter the Feature Select state. NOTE: The indicator on the VALUE switch stops flashing; the indicator on the FEATURE switch begins flashing. 2. Press NEXT to list the next feature and its current value. Press PREVIOUS to list the previous feature and its current value. NOTE: Each time you press NEXT or PREVIOUS. a new feature and its value is printed. and the paper advances 5 lines. If you press NEXT or PREVIOUS continuously. the printer prints the list of features and their values one line at a time. When you stop pressing the switch. the paper advances 5 lines. 26 PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS 3. - Stop at the feature whose value you want to change. Enter the Value Select state by pressing the VALUE switch. NOTE: If you return to the same feature several times without exiting the Setup mode, the printer will show the value that was previously stored in the set-up memorsy. 2.7.2.5 Saving New Values and Exiting Set-up Mode - To do this. press the SET-UP switch once. The feature/value changes are now stored in the printer’s set-up memory. The printer then automatically returns to the Print mode and moves to the pa next page. NOTE: If you turn off the printer’s power before you press the SET-UP switch. the new values will not be saved in the printer’s set-up memory. The Set-up menu gives you access to the LA75 printer memory. The memory stores the list of all of the printer's features and values as well as the values that you (or the factory at the time of shipping) have selected to run the printer. You can access the set-up menu through the procedure described in Paragraph 2.7.3. Table 2-2 shows the LA75 Set-up menu and the factory setting value for each - feature. Figure 2-5 is the printout of the actual LA75 Set-up menu. Table 2-2 LA75 Features, Values and Factory Settings Feature Value Number Feature Number Value 1 Baud Rate 110 200 300 600 1200 2400 4800 Factory Setting 9600 Data Bits and Parity 7-Even 7-Odd 7-Space 7-Mark 8-Even 8-Odd 8-None Protocol DEC Factory Setting | Factory Setting Other Form Length 12 inches 11 inches Factory Setting Character Set U.S. ASCII Factory Setting (DEC) Great Britian DEC Finland France DEC French Canada Germany Italy JIS Roman | DEC Norway/Denmark Spain DEC Sweden Norway/Denmark DEC Dutch DEC Swiss Portugal Reserved* *Value 16 shows “"Reserved” (available for future use). 28 PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS Table 2-2 LA75 Features, Values and Factory Settings (Cont) Feature Value Number Feature Number Value - DEC Supplemental Factory Setting O B [SO Supplemental b Katakana Print Density b Supplemental Draft (DEC) QO B 6 NLQ Character Set B (DEC) LA210 ID B b B bt CAN Control Code (DEC) Truncate Auto LF on CR e (DEC) Conformance Level 2 Auto CR on LF BN 12 Auto CRon LF Factory Setting No Auto CR Factory Setting Pt Auto LF on CR GO DD LA50 ID (DEC) 11 LQ Printer ID Margin (DEC) Factory Setting Memo (DEC) Text Mode Right 10 DEC Technical Cancel Control Factory Setting - Factory Setting Wrap No Auto LF Factory Setting Functions Kill Buffer 13 14 15 80 or 132 Columns 80 columns (DEC) 132 columns Paper Out Bell Off (Emulation) On Slashed Zero Zero with slash (Emulation) Zero without slash 16 Auto LF on CR Auto LF on CR {(Emulation) No auto line feed Factorv Setting Factory Setting Factory Setting Factory Setting Table 2-2 LA75 Features, Values and Factory Settings (Cont) Feature Value Number Feature Number Value 17 Active Character 1 Graphics Set A Set 2 Graphics Set B Factory Setting Auto CR on LF 1 Auto CR on LF (Emulation) 2 No auto CR Factory Setting Power-Up Print 1 Draft Factory Setting Quality 2 LQ or NLQ LQ/NLQ Select 1 Select NLQ (Emulation) 2 Select LQ (Emulation) 18 19 (Emulation) 20 Factory Setting 2.8.1 Features 1 — 4 These features set the values for baud rate, data bits and parity, form length. and protocol. They should be set to correspond to the information provided in your host computer’s user guide (or equivalent manual). These settings are ac- tive all the time. 1. Baud Rate The baud rate is the speed (bits per second) at which the computer communicates with the printer. 2. Data Bits and Parity | Data bits and parity determine the format that the printer will use to communicate with the host computer. Protocol 3. Protocol determines what software the LA75 is compatible with. Value 1 (DEC) sets the printer to be compatible with Digital com- - puters. Value 2 {Other) sets the printer to be compatible with software written for IBM Proprinter. .3 Form Length Form Length effects the form feed function. It allows you to manually define the form length at either 11 or 12 inches depending on the paper vou are using. 30 PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS 2.8.2 Features 5 — 13 DEC Protocol These features are active if you have selected "DEC” for the Protocol feature. d. Character Set (1 through 16) Chamcter Set defines the active character sets on power up. Choose the character set that matches the language you had used to develop your files. Refer to Appendix A in this manual for all available character sets. Supplemental Character Set This feature allows you to choose one of four supplemental character sets. Print Density Print density determines the quality of printing your printer will provide when it is turned on. The print densities are draft (250 cps). Memo (125 cps), Near Letter Quality (42 cps). and Letter Quality (32 cps). | Printer ID Printer ID defines the power-up device name used by the printer when responding to requests from your host computer. LA50 ID al- lows the printer to function as an LA50. LA210 ID allows it to function and respond as an LA210. Conformance Level 2 allows it to respond as a Level 2 device (functionally equivalent to LA210 printer). Text Mode Right Margin This feature controls processing of chamcters that go beyond the right margin. “Truncate” will ignore the charactersin a line that exceed the right margin. “Wrap” will print the characters that ex- ceed the right margin on the next line beginning at the left margin. 10. Auto Line Feed on CR This feature determines if the printer performs an automatic line feed (LF) on receiving the Carriage Return control code. PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS 31 11. Auto Carriage Return on LF This feature determines if the printer performs an automatic carriage return (CR) on receiving the Line Feed control code. 12. CAN Control Code This feature allows you to define the CAN function. When you select “1.” CAN cancels any escape or control function currently pro- cessed. When you select “2,” CAN erases the input buffer. 80 or 132 Columns This feature allows you to select print line width on power-up — 80 (10 char/inch) or 132 columns (16.5 char/inch). 2.8.3 Features 14 — 20 "Other” Protocol (IBM Emulation) When you select “Other” for the Protocol feature. you may want to set Features 14 — 20. 14. Paper-Out Bell Paper-Out Bell determines defines whether the printer will sound a bell when paper-out signal is detected. 15. Slashed Zero Slashed Zero gives you the choice of defining how the zero will be printed — with or without a slash through it. 16. Auto Line Feed on CR This feature determines whether the printer performs an automatic Line Feed (LF) on receiving the Carriage Return (CR) control code. 17. Active Character Set Active Character Set defines which graphic set the printer will use on power up — set A or B (Chapter 7). 18. Auto Carriage Return on LF This feature determines whether the printer will automatically per- form a carriage return on receiving the Line Feed (LF) control code. 19. Power-Up Print Density This feature determines the print quality your printer will provide when it is turned on. It can be draft printing or letter quality selec- tion (through Feature #20). 32 - PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS 20. LQor NLQ This feature defines the print quality (LQ or NLQ) your printer will provide when you select LQ/NLQ printing through the software or Feature #19. 2.9 FACTORY-SET POWER-ON STATUS Table 2-3 lists initial power-on conditions for printer operating parameters. Several parameters are switch-selectable through the set-up menu (Section 2.8) and may have one of several settings. Table 2-3 Power-On Status Program Selectable Control Parameters Function Printing status Power-on Status On-Line (Ready) Horizontal pitch DECSHORP Set-up feature #13 (10 or 16.5 cpi) Vertical pitch Forms length DECVERP - DECSLPP 6 lines/inch Set-up feature #4 (11 or 12 inches) Active position Compatibility mode Underlining Double underlining DECIPEM SGR SGR column 1, line 1 Set by menu Disabled Disabled Bolding SGR Disabled Italics Superscript Subscript SGR SGR SGR Disabled Disabled Disabled Printing density GL character set GR character set GO to G2 G3 Autowrap mode Horizontal tabs DECDEN Set by menu Same as GO Same as G2 Set by menu U.S. ASCII Set by menu Set at every eighth column Unsolicited status DSR HTS, DECSHTS, DECHTS Disabled Table 2-3 Power-On Status (Cont) Program Selectable Control Parameters Function Power-on Status Vertical tabs VTS, DECSVTS, Set at every line DECVTS Carriage return/ DECCCRNLM Set by menu LNM Set by menu DECSCL Set by menu Newline mode Linefeed/Newline mode Conformance level 2.10 SELF-TESTS The LA75 has self-tests that check internal logic and printhead/carriage opera- tion. If the selected test fails, the FAULT indicator on the front panel starts blinking. Refer to the manual Installing and Using the LA75 Companion Printer or call Digital Field Service. 2.10.1 Power-Up Self-Test This self-test automatically checks out the internal logic at power-up. 2.10.2 Printing Self-Test You can start this test by pressing the FORM FEED switch while turning power on. The printer should print 94 ASCII characters continuously in a 80- character wide swirl pattern (Figure 2-6). To stop the test, turn the printer off. PURELE () #d PUHEUL () wr THEUS () w4~ WELL $U8 Lh & - /0L 2345678 1 3 < m b ?RABCDEFGHI I KLMNOPORSTUVKWXYZIN I _“abodefghi jk T mno -, /0123456789 1 3 <=>?@ABCDEFGHII KLMNOPORSTUVWXYZIN] " _*abcdefghi jk 1 mnop /01234B6789 1 §<=>T@ABCDEFGHI ] KLMNOPORSTUVWXYZEI\] " _‘abcdefahi jk1mnopg /0123436789 1 1 <=>P@ABCDEFGHI ] KLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZL\]"_‘abcdefghi jk | mnopar -, /0123456789 1 § <=>?@ABCDEFGHI ] KLMNOPORSTUVWXYZI\N] " abcdefghi jk 1 mnopgrs = JOL123456789 1 j<=>7@ABCDEFGHI I KLMNOPORSTUVWXYZIN]" ‘abcdefghi jk) mnopgrst () w4~ () %+ () we () %+~ . /0123456789 1 1 <=>P@ABCDEFGHIJ KLMNOPRRSTUVWXYZL\]1"_‘abcdefghi jk1mnopgrstu YR~ ()#+ = /0123456789 1 1 {=>7@ABCDEFGHIJ KLMNOPGRSTUVWXYZIN 1" “abcdefghi jk I mnopgrstuyv /0123406789 1 § <= >7@ABCDEFGHI I KLMNOPORETUVWXYZIN\] " _‘abcdefghi jk 1 mnoparstuww ) #+,~ . /012345678 %4 = 1 1< =>?@ABCDEFGHI I KLMNOPRRSTUVWXYZIN]" _abcdefghi jk 1 mnopqr st uvex (0123456789 1 § <= >P@ABCDEFGHI ] KLMNOPGRETUVWXYZINI " *abcdefghi jk 1 mnoparst uvwxy *,~.1012945b7993p{w}?QflWCDEFGHIJKLMNDWQRSTUVWXVZE\J“m‘uhuda%yhijklmn ¢ = mpqrfituvwxyz /0123456789 ¢ § <= >?@ABCDEFGH I KLMNOPGRSTUVWXYZIN] " _‘abcdefghi jk 1 mnopgrstuvwxyz ( /01234567891 § <=,7@ABCDEFBHIIKLMNOPORSTUVHWXYZL\ " _‘abcdefghi jklmnoparstuvwxyz ] (| /0123456789 1 § <= >P@ABCDEFGHI ] KLMNOPORSTUVWXYZIN] " _“abcdefohi jkimnopgrstuvesyz (1) fO123456789 1 <= >?@ABCDEFGHIIKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZI " abcdefghi jk I mnopgrstuveeyz N] {1}~ 012345&7&?:;{*}?OflfiflnfiFfiHIJMLMNOWGRQTUW“XYZ[\]““‘lbadflfqhijklmnmpqrstukuvz{I)“ 123456789 1 1 <=>?@ABCDEFGH I ) KLMNOFPORSTUVWXYZIN]" _‘abcdefghi jk I mnopgrstuvewxyz (13~ ! 23456789 1 3 <= »7@ABCDEFGHII KLMNOFORST _*abcdefghi UVWXYZIN]" jk I mnoparstuvwxyz (3TM t# KLMNOPORSTUVWXYZIN] " _‘abcdefghi jkimnoparstuvexyz (13~ 19§ 456789 5 3 <= >P@ABCDEFGHIJ KLMNOPGRSTUVWXYZL\] " _‘abcdefghi jk i mnopgrstuvwxyz (13" ' "#$ 567891 § <= >7@ABCDEFGHI ) KLMNOPORSTUVKWXYZEN] " _‘abcdefghi jk i mnopagrstuvwxyz (1)~ ' "#$Y 6789 1 § <= »?@ABCDEFGHIJ KLMNOPORSTUV " _‘abcdefghi jkWXYZI\] I mnoparstuvwkyz (13~ ' "#8$%E 7894 3<=>7@ABCDEFGHII KLMNOPGRSTUV " > abcdefghi HWXYZIN] jkl mnopgrstuvwxyz (137 ' "H$%L’ BQ:3<~>?0ABGUKFGHIJKLNNWPQRSTUVWKYZ[\]“m‘abtdufqhiJklmnn@qutwvwxv:(I)“ PUREYL (| 3456789 3 3 <=>?@ABCDEFGH I W:;fim>?QA&CD€FGHIJKLMNOPQRETUVN!YZt\]“m‘ubfiunfghiJklmnapqrstuvwnvzc&}“ t <= 2PRABCDEFBH T I KLMNOFPORSTUV " ‘abcdefahi ikl WXYZILN] mnoparstuveryz (F)TM 1= P@ABCDEFGHI I KLMNOPORST " abcdefghi UVWXYZIN] ik I mnopgrstuvwyz (13~ LmFPEABCDEFGHT Y KLMNOFR PURELR () P BEYE’ () # " "RE%8° () #+ MA-0169-86 Figure 2-6 Printing Self-Test 34 PRINTER COMMUNICATION, CONTROLS, AND SELF-TESTS PART 2 LA75 IN DEC-COMPATIBLE MODE CHAPTER 3 CHARACTER PROCESSING CHAPTER 4 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXTMODE. . . . .. ... ... .. Coe e Co e e51 CHAPTER 5 STATUS, REPORT AND RESET SEQUENCES CHAPTER 6 GRAPHICMODE . . . . . . ... ... ... ...... 115 SR e s o — e AR p— s s s S G i oo S PR A o CHARACTER PROCESSING This chapter describes how the LA75 processes printable and control characters when operating in DEC-compatible text mode. The printer’s ability to perform certain printing and control functions depends on the Conformance Level setting. The LA75 can be set to two Conformance Levels — Level 1 or Level 2. Level 1 provides basic functionality and emulates the Digital LA50 printer, while Level 2 supports expanded functionality and emulates the Digital LA210 printer. You can select the Power-up Conformance Level through the set-up menu using the PRINTER ID feature (Section 2.8). The LA50 ID provides Level 1 performance. The LA210 and Level 2 [Ds provide Level 2 performance. Level 1 functions are always active in the LA75. Level 2 functions become ac- tive only if the printer is set as a Level 2 device. For more information on Level 1 and 2 functions. refer to Section 4.4. 3.2 CODING STANDARDS The LA75 processes characters according to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard X3.4-1977. The ANSI standard is based on the character’s category, either printable or control. Categories are defined by the American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII). Control characters do not print. They affect how the printer processes, sends. and prints characters. 37 3.3 7-BIT AND 8-BIT ENVIRONMENTS The LA75 is set to send and receive 7- or 8-bit data through the Set-up menu (Section 2.8). In a 7-bit environment, 128 control and printable character codes are available (Figure 3-1). In an 8-bit environment, 256 control and printable character codes are available (Figure 3-2). Figure 3-1 is the standard U.S. ASCII character set table. Figure 3-2 is the 8-bit DEC multinational character set. Figure 3-3 is the ISO multinational (ISO Latin-1) character set. A character set table shows all the characters in a character set. The table also shows the codes for each character. You can represent a character by its position (column/row) in a table. For example, you can represent the character H in Figure 3-1 as 4/8 (column 4/row 8). This manual uses this notation. The 8-bit character set has twice as many characters as the 7-bit set. The left half of the 8-bit set is identical to the 7-bit set. You can tell whether a character is a printable character or a control character by looking at its position in the character set table. There are two sets of control characters, CO and C1. CO characters are 7-bit (that is, the eighth bit is set to 0) control characters. The characters from 0/0 to 1/15 in both tables are CO control characters. C1 characters are 8-bit (the eighth bit is 1) control characters and are located in the positions from 8/0 to 9/15 in the 8-bit table. You can use C1 characters only in an 8-bit environment. You can use two sets of printable characters at one time. The printer stores the two active sets in areas called GL (graphic left) and GR (graphic right). GL characters are 7-bit printable characters. The characters from 2/1 to 7/14 in both tables are GL characters. GR characters are 8-bit printable characters. The characters from 10/1 to 15/14 in the 8-bit table are GR characters. You can use GR codes only in an 8-bit environment. 38 CHARACTER PROCESSING B7 Bé 0 B5 BITS B4 B3 B2 B1|ROW 00000 o ] COLUMN O ) o cm)w} 1 2 001 0 2 6| SP 27 ! 17 11 22 2 9 c3 4 % 6 22 & 27 r 15 2% 16 10 | e 1 000/|8 BS 100 1|9 gy HT 101 0/f10 | 101 1 |n 21 23 7 T 8 CAN 24 3 6 26 47 39 50 ) | 32] % @ 19 A 1A ; 13 ~ | 33 ; ’ B 14 10 Sus % . E 1€ 111 1|18 17 a7 ’ F 1F SI 0 15 N 164 100 t 116 165 55 126 65 146 74 B3 E 108 B0 u 125 85 145 10 u 54 F , 70 v 86 102 v RS 166 107 ; TM 103 187 150 170 36 67 55 37 70 45 106 46 G H ; 56 i w 127 110 . | 130 73 Y 131 112 47 56 38 | ] 48 X 57 88 118 76 67 19 731 o] % 120 89 151 wsf Y 171 58 68 78 90 152 wel] £ | 42 + 53 43 . ' 73 59 K 113 75 [ 133 153 { ’ 44 < 60 L 76 \ 58 134 68 154 = 75 39 28 1 54 | 2¢ 45 * a6 / 57 1 2€ 47 2F 34 > ? 3B 74 ic 61 1 1 78 62 3E 77 63 3F 111 87 86 117 132 0 56 ; 84 , 1D 36 30 T J [] Z : T 1 1 014 44 58 QR 16 68 72 T 101t 14 64 104 : 29 _ | s ' 144 54 D 72 42 s 1o 163 114 |52 | 15 29 o 124 42 1 CR 13 7 162 62 r 57 28 )13 ‘ 52 e e 12 1C 61 142 70 113 161 41 FF c 82 112 7 1 10 0]12 , 51 122 q , ’ 41 102 160 97 uil 35 66 8 141 123 85 24 ESC 27 18 34§ 28 | 81 s 34 7 121 || 52 38 25 46 25 12 1 P R 64 5 51 |, 11 1 w| 66 32 ; 60 Q 3 62 4 47 40 LF VT 45 1 ( 18 B 24 27 30 | M 8 | 17 and| 36 50 80 65 c 44 P 140 101 63 $ 64 120 A 61 ‘ 5 oy 1 1 49 43 g 1 ¢ 1 EL 7 21 42 1 2 25 o1t 1 1]7 ‘ 40 48 12 5 7 41 a3 30 23 14 6 0 100 B 24 5 6 32 20 80 5O 20 4 , ‘ 7 40 2 4 M ¥ 0 34 4 01001} a 011 01|68 1) 1] 3 ) o 10 1 1 2 0] 0 000 11 0 1 1 1 PR NUL o L] 0 49 4A 48 114 4C s M 77 4D 16l N 78 ' B 91 92 BA 107 79, 172 TATL 173 123 78 174 108 l 124 736 155 178 50 136 109 } 60 156 ] o 70 176 5C 93 A 68 6C ¢ 125 84 110 117 137 157 177 4F 5F 6F 7 4E o : 50 121 790 5E 95 8E 126 7€ mi DEL | 127 ascii cHARACTER| BSC | B | O°TAt 27 18§ § DECIMAL HEX T C WS TR Figure 3-1 7-Bit U.S. ASCII Character Set CHARACTER PROCESSING 39 40 CHARACTER PROCESSING vTKoB80ai16€9>0aR28lmB1Io80o¥8MTe1lO1ElLy]-1ST4N81oS||zso£843itooyg|N[ONVXIi|)ao|PlAtImaocei-01|4.o/«y.8z|.4o0£witTo£0vl8yzzo6|30oS£&4t51iE9€|@.o;4|oo#E5viseotTo8tSvl-|oTdyoJf340|oH11etis%u85688|2E3go0[«I|TRVaf(8YoNi43&o0ES0)9o9m1Ot|ILVAVb9goPYNL||L£o[e(|al)13t2Io2L1zTcNtW€qSiY81iHLdSdAAH28L|Ove|so8D43iot=zl8n088Vt|H|J8V1S1d0H8S¥0D|96|1¥10o&|s3e358zz¥ati6i6w|z6L/%XA»]{!ot|.0sefgolvvi8oLavLgii|tzaz%?+o«41|_1Jo8f|lew363o8Limmtts81z8e3.MvWvFMIHS.4}|0SoofJJ||3ew0)i0ezxo2g2|se.O§@mN.».€1ofo8flJe3Ee0ioci0zzzae|J8!@|eB|AoV~vi|.0f¥eooez33s0zZz33e|¢A/.MB&WUSt|.5£o0seos483ig5Lz444¢-Ez| ‘ £2z || IWiVL0 I2Ingijgg-¢3SgV-J§OHDLNAOD[RuOljRIUSNVJIIH1A9V3H0DeiHRAyL)OVHjVoHIS135 1.0VTOHLNOD D30TWVANIWITJNSJHAVHO43S YAWLBO'0L- g0s1otl0ooi8Tl1vi8oI]0sgzcIo1elml0oTo|i88|LHOgd0NISlW—N03I||0gDviw=isBaZ6998¥3Lsgv¥gv£1l14zt¢0i||G|14[0NJ2€4S‘08|1o3]0)||1ssoi£gT0&|Vx57s4vJK6z£ao88Lzi9€tLzit1te1tEf|l|]¥*%*#$(Ii0||:364vva&L8iioesa9s(8wv%zo¥z47¥£1yyzszZ€2t€|e[ 8o5g1Iv&zeL#£ziuog2z0a8z1iJL¥30L5s9tE¢e€95€Eeyg)wNDT9vWT8o31|@t5|1amJsJoaJjeJf1£%b8-6)8sIr9zvie(750eira]oovytr941s3ut|dn|y0Mv1NAYLZAS{l]JJ1LlevZ|1v249aEov582eI6&80€|E££z7“e1al)rs4ttiL5%=s58l||1lisB1]YM8qP®9e8i:!{||Jv5|s{gzdiJi0J2£M6v5o9a1oLz59£5eLsp6£oT0tpm9wny1i1tsto9t%|4|Jy0oWA8¥MT~A‘Q1||fv8o€]z01s|sozesw8o.i2oENZv9z-a€i)Lii44rT11zttL1l¢)S!tt[z|SJQisANIN0|Lgp594%Z125€£1zSo.iiai1oL]2Hv.98&5z£¥00EeEc1Z4t1z14888zi8L2zL2l|WRl3ed]0£gfv9L1Li85£8v|a1o|aa2I€E6ge6z€5&%s2z2e1vxos1éZ8z16nz6dztit6m@L&§3o|vg9(£{51Loj8e£»i|laJo&7vs84s54vv£9e5¥4zo4Vovar2y!VZztm|1|P2€L®oo(seeg92u£(ovg€1lJ|1a8)53Tg¥9#w€es88zoi2ozzmu%at4228l8ee8zm|W5Y¥WYV!||1Lz(sviLvE1slJejl|°2t4¥e[6ieFF58io4o1eao60132EsetE]5|£5c[¢e31)d)|D%mOQO|~1iSZ£s4Lvz»s8L|J%elJt1v5s8¥EeEEw£eua£aeuzz0ZzZ2&iiLzQ0eaEgteaqEQe4azEa|g|@~B85€®!|e£vgs9%a1og|HvlLJ2¥€5821&F635oSeEis[vzt043z333)€ZgEe:||iO0@Qy‘i-|||£s{91evsw2oese£LG5£4LAwL8z9§t8evoz2EEd4E6‘4|4tL€z¢e|ec |JnmeuosaonIsmssveSvyko B 88182%P8¢58861o783T8|T083P{81 HOSYJOULNOD hbeidinds, 10VHINOD ‘, ioalo28z]Zs8iitt1‘8/vP1z446ii03t9L&1IY3y4%s1%1B9o¥i74t3o2Bv8P8i8885si661%7ai1£e1vyyv|AR18288E1o(&i0=z33)ogi5zga0z||s'118y3z3)bz4z8s44z §ko9tt¢2 i¢]otioo] TYWID30 wido o0,]l4€=8Lvart3s AslOE3N@J(e|LvTj[BiRam12Elzu|Kmh w¥i‘6W3v8y0e X3H 19§ 19j0rIey)) [RUOIRULMN OS] 31g-§ £-¢ 9Ingi] -"o 3.4 CHARACTER SET MAPPING The printer lets you use one GL set and one GR set at a time. Each set has 94 character codes reserved. In a 7-bit environment, you can use the 94 GL set codes (2/1 to 7/14). In an 8-bit environment, you can use the 94 GL set codes plus the 94 GR set codes (10/1 to 15/14). Printable characters are usually grouped into sets of 94. You can map any two available sets into GL and GR. If your application requires more then 188 printable characters, you can designate up to four sets as G0, G1, G2, and G3. Then, you can map one of those sets into GL or GR for printing. Figure 3-4 shows how to designate and map character sets in an 8-bit environment. Figure 3-5 shows hows to designate and map character sets in a 7-bit environment. Paragraph 4.5.5 describes the commands to select specific character sets. NOTE: There are 96 printable characters in the ISO supplemental character set. All 96 characters can be accessed from the GR set using locations 10/0 and 15/15 as printable characters. (See Figure 3-3.) 3.5 CONTROL CHARACTERS A control character is a single character that starts, modifies. or stops a printer function. Control characters do not print. The LA75 recognizes two sets of control characters, CO and C1 (Figure 3-2). The following paragraphs describe the function of each control character. NOTE: Each control character is assigned a mnemonic (abbreviation of the control function name). 42 CHARACTER PROCESSING s | 8-BIT SET IN USE - SO OR LS1 ‘ SI OR L@ MAPPING} 552 OR LS2 LSTR $S3 OR LS3 . LS2R - DESIGNATING) ESC..IF ESCI.. IF ESCI. IF ESCT..IF |GRAPHIC IREPERTORY| @ LS3R | MA-G2T8-82H and Mapping Character Sets Figure 3-4 Designating (8-Bit Environment) RIS 7-BIT SET IN USE MAPPING) SI OR LS¢ @ soonis: ..J GO G1 r DESIGNATING} ESC | ...IF G2 ESC | ...IF @ SS2 OR LS2 G3 r r ESC | ..IF e @ SS3 OR LS3 ESC | ..IF s S REPERTORY| LJTM MA-O280-82C Figure 3-6 Designating and Mapping Character Sets (7-Bit Environment) R 44 CHARACTER PROCESSING 3.5.1 CO (7-Bit) Control Characters Table 3-1 lists t;lj;e CO control characters that the LA75 printer recognizes. Table 3-1 CO (7-Bit) Text Mode Control Characters Mnemonic Column/Row Function Printer Control Functions Bell 0/7 BEL BS Backspace 0/9 0/10 0/11 0/12 0/13 HT LF VT FF CR Horizontal tab Line feed Vertical tab Form feed Carriage return 0/8 Character Set Control Functions 0/14 0/15 SO SI Shift out Shift in Communication Control Functions 0/0 NUL Null 1/1 DC1 XON DC3 CAN SUB XOFF Cancel Substitute ESC Escape 1/3 1/8 1/10 , 1/11 NOTE: The printer ignores all other ASCII CO control characters. 3.5.1.1 Bell (BEL) - This character causes the bell to sound for 300 milliseconds (0.3 seconds). 3.5.1.2 Backspace (BS) - This character decreases the active column by one column space at the current horizontal pitch (Paragraph 4.5.2). If the active column is at the left margin, the BS character is ignored. If the active column is one column beyond the right margin. you can use a BS character to print or overprint at the right margin. | 3.5.1.3 Horizontal Tab (HT) - A horizontal tab is a preselected print position on a line. When the printer receives an HT character. the printhead advances to the next tab position on the line. Starting at column 9. the printer has de- fault horizontal tab stops every 8 columns. Each time you change the horizontal pitch (Paragraph 4.4.1). the horizontal tab positions change appropriately. NOTE: Horizontal tab stops can be changed only if you activate Level 2 (Level 2/LA210) functions. When there are no more tab stops to the right of the active column, the right margin feature selection in the set-up menu controls the effect of an HT char- acter (Section 2.8). B ° [f the right margin switch is set to wrap and HT is received, a printable character (including a space) causes the printer to perform a carriage return and line feed. ° R [f the right margin switch is set to truncate and HT is received. the printer ignores printable characters (including spaces) until the ac- tive column returns to the printable area. 3.5.1.4 Line Feed (LF) - This character increases the active line by one line at the current vertical pitch (Paragraph 4.4.2). If less than one line remains unprinted on the current page, the LF character sets the active line to the top-of-form position on the next page. 3.5.1.5 Vertical Tab (VT) - A vertical tab is a preselected line setting on a page. When the printer receives a VT character, the active line moves to the next tab position on the page. The printer has default vertical tab stops at every line. (This effectively causes the VT character to be processed as a LF character.) Each time you change the vertical pitch (Paragraph 4.4.2), vertical tab positions change appropriately. NOTE: You can set and reset the vertical tab stops only if the printer is set to Level 2 conformance (Paragraph 4.6.5). 46 CHARACTER PROCESSING g 3.5.1.6 Form Feed (FF) - This character advances the active line to the next top-of-form position (Paragraph 4.5.4). 3.5.1.7 Carriage Return (CR) - This character sets the active column to the left margin. 3.5.1.8 Shift Out (SO) - This uharacter selects the G1 character set as the GL active character set. 3.5.1.9 Shift In (SI) - This character selects the GO character set as the GL active character set. 3.5.1.10 Null (NUL) - This character does not affect the printer’'s operation. 3.5.1.11 XON (DC1) - This character performs no action. It is sent by the printer for input buffer control. 3.5.1.12 XOFF (DC3) - This character performs no action. It is sent by the printer for input buffer control. 3.5.1.13 Cancel (CAN) - Depending on selection of the CAN Control Code fea- | ture in the set-up menu (Section 2.8), this character can perform one of two functions: 1. If the CAN feature is set to “Cancel Control Functions,” the CAN control character immediately cancels (without executing) any escape sequence, control sequence, or control string currently being processed. 2. If the CAN feature is set to "Kill Buffer,” the CAN character, upon entering the input buffer, immediately clears the entire input buffer. The Kill Buffer command acts even if the printer has sent the XOFF to the host computer. NOTE: The Kill Buffer command does not reset the printer to its initial state. All data including unprocessed control functions in the buffer are lost. Therefore. it is strongly recommended that you follow the Kill Buffer command with the DECSTR reset sequence (Section 5.6) to put the printer in a known state. The Kill Buffer command is intended to be usgd for immediate control purposes and should be used with caution. s 3.5.1.14 Substitute (SUB) - This character immediately stops the processing of any escape or control sequence. The SUB character prints as the error charac- ter (reverse question mark). 3.5.1.15 Escape (ESC) - This character introduces an escape sequence (Chapter 4). 3.5.2 C1 (8-Bit) Text Control Characters Table 3-2 lists the C1 control characters the LA75 printer recognizes. Table 3-2 C1 (8-Bit) Text Mode Control Characters Column/Row Mnemonic Function Printer Control Functions 8/11 PLD Partial line down 9/12 PLU Partial line up 8/4 IND Forward index (Level 2) 8/5 NEL Next line (Level 2) 8/8 HTS Horizontal tab set (Level 2) 8/10 VTS Vertical tab set (Level 2) Character Set Control Functions SR 8/14 SS2 Single shift 2 8/15 SS3 Single shift 3 Communication Control Functions 9/0 DCS Device control string 9/11 CSI Control sequence introducer 9/12 ST String terminator 9/13 OSC Operating System command 9/14 PM Privacy Message 9/15 APC Application Program Command NOTE: The printer ignores all other C1 control characters. 48 CHARACTER PROCESSING E 3.5.2.1 Partial Line Down (PLD) - This character advances the paper 1/12 inch (Paragraph 4.5.1). 3.5.2.2 Partial Line Up (PLU) - This character reverses the paper 1/12 inch (Paragraph 4.5.1). 3.5.2.3 IND, NEL, HTS, and VTS - These control characters are Level 2 functions (Section 4.5.6). 3.5.2.4 Single Shift 2 (8S2) - This 'character selects the next printable character from the G2 character set (Paragraph 4.5.5). 3.5.2.5 Single Shift 3 (SS3) - This character selects the next printable character from the G3 character set (Paragraph 4.5.5). 3.5.2.6 Device Control String (DCS) Introducer - This character introduces a device control string. See Paragraph 4.1.3 for a description of DCS format and functions. 3.5.2.7 Control Sequence Introducer (CSIl) - This character introduces a control sequence. See Paragraph 4.1.2 for a description of the control sequence format. | 3.5.2.8 String Terminator (ST) - ST terminates a control string. See Paragraph 4.1.3 for a description and a list of control strings. 3.5.2.9 OSC, PM, and APC - These control characters introduce unused control strings. See Paragraph 4.1.3 for more information on unused control strings. 3.6 PRINTABLE, SPACE AND SPECIAL CHARACTERS The LA75 usually interprets characters in the column/row range of 2/0 to 7/14 (GL) and 10/1 to 15/14 (GR) as printable characters. The space (SP) character is 2/0. The LA75 prints a character at the active position on a page, defined by the active column and active line. Each printable or space character then increases the active column by one active column. advancing the printhead one column at the current horizontal pitch (Paragraph 4.5.2). CHAI IACTER PROCESSING 49 s [f the active column is at the right margin, the right margin feature selection in the set-up menu (Section 2.8) controls the effect of the next printable character as described in Paragraph 3.5.1.3. The DEL character (7/15) is normally ignored. The characters at 10/0 and 15/15 have a special effect on printer operation. In text mode, the printer normally processes the 10/0 character as an error character (reverse question mark). However, if a 96-character set resides in the GR. this character is processed as a normal printable character. The printer normally ignores the 15/15 character. However, if the 96-character set resides in the GR, this character is processed as a normal printable character. 3.7 CHARACTER CELL The LA75 prints characters using up to 12 dots (Draft mode) or up to 24 dots (LQ mode) vertically. However. the printhead has only 9 actual elements at 1/72" spacing. Characters larger that 9 must be printed on a second pass of the printhead. Table 3-3 shows which dots are addressed for various printing modes and characters. Table 3-3 Character Generation Character Group/Attribute Printhead Elements Used Draft LQ (2 Pass Printing) Capitals 1—7 1 —14 Lower Case 3—9 5 — 18 Ascenders 1 and 2 1—4 Descenders ‘8and 9 15 — 18 ASCII Underline Character 9 17 VT100 Line Drawing 1 — 12 (2 pass) 1 — 24 (4 pass) 1 — 12 (2 pass) 1 — 24 (4 pass) (SGR) Underline 9 17 (SGR) Double Underline 10 and 12 (2 pass) 19 and 23 (3 pass) Characters Digital Technical Composite Characters 50 CHARACTER PROCESSING This chapter describes the text mode control functions and their use in controlling the LA75 text printing in DEC mode. These control functions are grouped into two categories — Conformance Level 1 and Conformance Level 2 functions. 4.1 ESCAPE SEQUENCE, CONTROL SEQUENCE, AND CONTROL STRING FORMATS The LA75 uses escape and control sequences standardized by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) to control many of its functions. Other LA75 functions have escape sequences defined within the parameters of the ANSI standard. ANSI standards X3.4-1977 and X3.32-1973 define the escape and control sequences used in this chapter. 4.1.1 Escape Sequence Format The LA75 format for an escape sequence is as follows. ESC 1/11 Escape Sequence Introducer I 2/0 to 2/15 ~ F 3/0 to 7/14 Intermediate Final Characters Character (0 or more {1 character) characters) The escape sequence introducer is the ESC control character (1/11). When the printer receives the ESC character. the printer processes the following charac- ters as part of the escape sequence. rather than printing them. The characters must be in the correct escape sequence format to be processed correctly. 51 A character received after ESC in the 2/0 to 2/15 range is an intermediate character. (The numbers 2/0 and 2/15 indicate a position in a character set table, such as Figure 3-1.) The printer may process zero, one, or more intermediate characters in a valid LA75 escape sequence. | A character received after ESC in the 3/0 to 7/14 range is a final character. The final character indicates the end of the escape sequence. The intermediate and final characters together define the function of the sequence. The printer performs the action specified by the sequence. then continues to process received characters as specified. The printer ignores sequences it does not recognize. Example Action: Assign the U.S. ASCII character set as the GO set. Sequence: ESC { B 1/11 2/8 4/2 | | | | | | | | | Intermediate Character Final Character Escape Sequence Introducer 4.1.2 Control Sequence Format The LA75 format for a control sequence is as follows. CSI P..P | F 9/11 3/0 — 3/15 2/0 — 2/15 4/0 — 7/14 Control Parameter Intermediate Final Sequence Characters Characters Character (0 or more (0 or more (1 character) characters) characters) [Introducer 52 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE The control sequence introducer (CSI) is the 8-bit C1 control character (9/11). You can also use the equivalent 7-bit sequence ESC [ (1/11. 5/11). See Section 4.2 for C1 control characters and their equivalent 7-bit sequences. After receiving the CSI, the printer stores (but does not print) the next received characters as part of the sequence. The characters must be in the correct format. as follows. Parameter characters are characters received after the CSI. in the 3/0 to 3/15 range. A parameter character (usually an ASCII digit) modifies the action or interpretation of the sequence. All parameters are interpreted as unsigned decimal integers. with the most significant digit sent first. Leading zeros are al- lowed but are not necessary. Plus and minus signs are not allowed in parameter characters. You must separate parameters with a semicolon ; (3/11). The printer processes two types of parameters, numeric and selective. A numeric parameter (Pn) indicates an actual numeric value. such as a tab or mar- gin location. A selective parameter (Ps) indicates a numeric value associated with a specific action. For example, in the LA75’s device status report se- quence (Section 5.4), the Ps value of 21 indicates a hardware failure. NOTE: This manual uses Pn, Ps, or P plus another letter to represent param- eter characters (except when their actual value is shown). Since parameter values vary, their column/row positions appear as asterisks **¥*, [f you do not specify a decimal value for a parameter character in a sequence, the printer assumes a value of 0. There is a limit of 16 numeric parameters per string. The printer will store the first 16 parameters received and ignore those that follow. [f the printer receives an out-of-range parameter in a string of parameters. the printer ignores the out-of-range parameter and processes the other parameters. When all parameters in a sequence are out of range or the sequence is invalid, the printer performs no action. [f the printer receives the ? character (3/15) at the beginning of a string of parameters. the printer notes the event for later reference. When the final character of the string is received, the presence or absence of this event determines the validity and meaning of the sequence. Mg [f the printer receives the ":” (3/10). "<” (3/12), "=" (3/13), or “>" (3/14) characters while processing a parameter string, or if the ? (3/15) character is received after the first character of a parameter string, the printer processes the sequence but performs no action. Characters received after the CSI in the 2/0 to 2/15 range are intermediate characters. The printer may process zero, one, or more intermediate characters in a valid LA75 control sequence. A character received after the CSI in the 4/0 to 7/14 range is a final character. The final character indicates the end of a control sequence and defines the function of the sequence. After receiving the final character. the printer per- forms the action specified by the sequence. The printer ignores sequences it does not recognize. Example Action: Set horizontal pitch to 17.1 characters per inch. i Sequence: B CSI 4 w 9/11 3/4 7/7 | | | | | Final Character B Parameter Character Control Sequence Introducer 54 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 4.1.3 Control String Format A device control 'string is a delimited string of characters that is used in a data stream as a logical entity for control purposes. Control string format is as follows: String Protocol Introducer Selector Data String String Terminator DCS OSC P.PIL.IF PM D...D D...D D..D ST ST ST APC D...D ST where: P...P are parameters I...I are intermediate characters F' is a final character D...D is data ST is a string terminator. LA75 string introducers are the C1 control characters Device Control String (DCS), Operating System Command (OSC), Privacy Message (PM), and Application Program Command (APC). The OSC, PM., and APC characters introduce unused control strings and perform no action. In the LA75, the DCS character introduces three control strings (described later in this manual). ° o Sixel Graphic mode Assignment of User-Preference Supplemental Character Set (DECAUPSS) . Level 2 character downline-loading (DECDLD) DCS (9/0) is an 8-bit control character. You can also express it as ESC P when coding in a 7-bit system. ST (9/12) can also be expressed in a 7-bit environment as ESC \ (Paragraph 4.2.2). Table 4-1 describes LA75 processing of the DCS and unused control string data. | Table 4-1 Control Strings 8-bit 7-bit Processing After String Name Mnemonics Sequence Introducer is Received Device Control DCS ESC P Processing begins. String 9/0 /11 5/0 It a CO character is received. the printer processes it if applicable. If ESC. CAN. SUB. ST. or a C1 character is received. the printer enters Text mode and processes the control command. [f the final character is "q”, the printer exits the protocol selector and enters the sixel graphic mode (Chapter 6). It the final character is “u”. the printer enters the DECAUPSS data command string. If the final character is ”!” (in Level 2). the printer enters the DECDLD data command string. If the final character is other than "q”, "u”. or ”{”. the DCS data string is ignored until ESC, CAN, ST, SUB, or a C1 character is received. 56 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE Table 4-1 Control Strings (Cont) 8-bit Name | 7-bit Processing After String Mnemonics Sequence Introducer is Received Operating System OSC ESC | If ESC. CAN. SUB. ST. or Command 9/13 1/11 5/13 a C1 character is received, the printer enters Text mode and processes the control command. Otherwise. the data string is ignored. Privacy Message | PM ESC ° 9/14 1/11 5/14 Application Program APC ESC Command 9/15 1/11 N ' Same as above. Same as above. 5/15 4.1.4 Error Handling This section describes what happens when the printer receives invalid param- eters, invalid sequences. or sequences with embedded control characters. The printer generally recovers from such errors by performing as much of the se- quence as possible. Sequences not recognized by the printer are ignored. If a sequence has an invalid selective parameter. the printer ignores the sequence. If a numeric parameter exceeds its numeric limit. the printer uses the maximum allowable value for that parameter (unless otherwise specified in this manual). If a sequence includes CO control character, except for cancel (CAN), substitute (SUB), or escape (ESC), the printer processes those char- acters as if they were received before the sequence. The printer then continues to process the sequence. A CAN (1/8) or SUB (1/10) character in a sequence cancels that se- quence and returns the printer to Text mode character processing. The CAN or SUB is then processed. An ESC (1/11) character in a sequence cancels that sequence. The printer then starts processing another escape sequence. ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 57 ° [f the printer receives a C1 control character within an escape sequence, the sequence is aborted and the C1 character is processed if it is applicable to the printer. If the 10/0 character is received. it is treated as a SPACE (2/0) character, within the sequence. The 15/15 a DELETE (7/15) character. and is ignored. character is processed as NOTE: 15'15 character is treated as DELETE and is ignored if it is found inside the escape sequence. ® It the printer receives a GR character during an escape or control sequence, this character will be stripped of the elghth bit and pro- cessed as a GL character. . CO and C1 control characters do not change the status or processing of a single shift (SS2 or SS3) control character (Paragraph 4.4.5.2). The printer processes control characters in sequence. 4.2 7-BIT AND 8-BIT CONVERSIONS You do not need to convert from 7-bit to 8-bit coding. However. such conversion could improve the data transmission rate. If you need to operate in a 7-bit environment. you must convert 8-bit codes into 7-bit equivalents. 4.2.1 Converting 7-Bit Control Sequence to Equivalent 8-Bit C1 Control Character The 8-bit C1 control functions are coded as 2-character sequences of the form ESC Fe. Fe is a final character from columns four and five on the standard 8-bit character chart (Figure 3-2). The following steps convert the C1 equivalent ESC Fe control functions to 1-byte C1 control characters. 1. Remove the ESC character. 2. Set the eighth bit of the final character. 3. Clear the seventh bit of the final character. 4.2.2 Converting 8-Bit C1 Control Character to Equwalent 7-Bit Control Sequence The 8-bit C1 control characters are coded as single characters from columns eight and nine on the standard 8-bit character chart (Figure 3-2). 58 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 3 R You can convert C1 control characters to equivalent 2-character ESC Fe se- quences as follows. 1. Insert an ESC character. 2. Clear the eighth bit of the C1 code. 3. Set the seventh bit of the C1 code. Table 4-2 summarizes valid LA75 C1 control characters and their 7-bit escape sequence equivalents. (You can also refer to Paragraph 3.5.2.) Table 4-2 Control Function Equivalents 8-Bit 7-Bit Control Character Escape Sequence PLD (8/11) - PLU (8/12) SS2 (8/14) SS3 (8/15) ESCK(1/11 4/11) ESC L (1/11 4/12) ESC N (1/11 4/14) 1 ESC O (1/11 4/15) DCS (9/0) ESC P (1/11 5/0) CSI (9/11) ESC[(1/11 5/11) ST (9/12) ESC\(1/11 5/12) OSC (9/13) ESC ](1/11 5/13) PM (9/14) APC (9/15) | ESCA(1/11 5/14) ESC _(1/11 5/15) Level 2 Only IND (8/4) ESC D (1/11 4/4) NEL (8/5) ESC E (1/11 4/5) HTS (8/8) ESC H (1/11 4/8) VTS (8/10) ESC J (1/11 4/10) 4.2.3 Converting 8-Bit GR Selection To 7-Bit Equivalent Use the character set designation sequences in this chapter (Paragraph 4.4.5) to designate the desired set as G2. Then. for any GR code, first send an SS2 function followed by the code with the eighth bit set to 0. 4.2.4 C1 Control Character Transmit and Receive You can specify processing of C1 control codes (C1 Transmit or Receive — S8CI1T, S7C1T. S8C1R, S7C1R) only if Conformance Level 2 is selected. If you select Level 1, the printer transmits and receives C1 codes according to the noted power-up defaults (S7C1T and S8C1R). C1 Transmit ESC SP G /11 2/0 4)7 (S8C1T) Transmit C1 control codes as 8-bit C1 codes. If you select a 7-bit environment (in the set-up menu). the printer ignores this sequence. ESC SP F /11 2/0 4/6 (S7C1T) — power-up default Transmit C1 control codes as equivalent 7-bit ESC Fe sequences. C1 Receive ESC SP 7 /11 2/0 3/7 (S8C1R) — power-up default Enables processing of 8-bit C1 control characters. Equivalent 7-bit ESC Fe sequences are also processed. ESC SP 6 /11 2/0 3/6 (S7C1R) Disables processing of 8-bit C1 control characters in 8-bit environment. The eighth bit of a received C1 character is stripped. The printer processes it as a CO character. ESC Fe sequences are also processed. 60 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 4.3 DEC CONFORMANCE LEVELS The LA75 can be set for one of two conformance levels that provide basic or enhanced operating and printing capabilities, interface features. and compatibility with appropriate software. A Conformance level is a fixed group of functions common to a class of devices that satisfies certain hardware/software compatibility requirements. New func- tions require the creation of new conformance levels that are supersets of the levels below it. Each level consists of a number of functions which must be included in all products that implement that level of conformance. The LA75 can operate as a Level 1 or a Level 2 device. Level 1 provides basic printing and interface functions that are always active in the LA75, are LA50-compatible. and can be activated by selecting the LA50 Printer ID in the set-up menu (Section 2.8). Level 2 adds the expanded printing functions that can be activated by selecting the Level 2 or LA210 Printer ID in the set-up menu. The Level 2 device al- ways has the Level 1 functions active plus a subset of additional functions. You can select the conformance level with the Printer ID feature in the set-up menu (Section 2.8) and/or by using the DECSCL control sequence (Section 5.1). 4.3.1 Level 1 and Level 2 Function Summary Table 4-3 lists Level 1 and 2 functions and lets you differentiate between the two devices. The functions are described in detail in Chapters 4. 5, and 6. The LA75 is shipped as a LA50-compatible (Level 1 functionality) device. ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 61 Table 4-3 Level 1 and 2 Functions Level 1 Level 2 Horizontal Form Handling Horizontal pitch Set Page Width Alignment (DECHPWA) (DECSHORP) Set Left and Right Margins (DECSLRM) — Horizontal Tab Set Control Code (HTS) Set Horizontal Tab Stops (DECSHTS) - Horizontal Tab Set (DECHTS) Tabulation Clear (TBC) o Clear All Horizontal Tabs (DECCAHT) Vertical Form Handling Vertical Pitch (DECVERP) Page Length (DECSLPP) Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM) Vertical Tab Set Control Code (VTS) Vertical Tab Set (DECVTS) Set Vertical Tab Stops (DECSVTS) Tabulation Clear (TBC) — Clear All Vertical Tabs (DECCAVT) Active Position Control Partial Line Down (PLD) Forward Index Control Code (IND) Partial Line Up (PLU) Next Line Control Code (NEL) Autowrap Mode (DECAWM) Carriage Return New Line Mode (DECCRNLM) Linefeed New Line Mode (LNM) Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA) Horizontal Position Relative (HPR) Vertical Position Absolute (VPA) Vertical Position Relative (VPR) Character Set Selection Single and Locking Shifts (SS2. SS3, SI. Character Set Downline-loading (DECDLD) SO, LS2. LS3. LSI1R, LS2R. LS3R) Select Character Set Sequence (SCS) 62 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE - Table 4-3 Level 1 and 2 Functions (Cont) Level 1 '5 Level 2 Character Set Selection Assign User-Preference Supplemental Character Set (DECAUPSS) ANSI Announcer Sequence Print Speed. Printing Quality and Highlighring Selection Print Density Selection Select Unidirectional/Bidirectional (DECDEN) Printing (DECUPM) Selection of Graphic Rendition (SGR) DEC Private Select Graphic Rendition (DECSGR) Optional Form Handling Automatic Sheet Feeder Control (DECASFC) Status, Report, and Reset Requests (Chapter 5) Set Conformance Level (DECSCL) [IBM Proprinter Emulation Mode (DECIPEM) Product Identification (DA) Printer Status Request (DSR) Printer Status Report (DSR) Reset To Initial State (RIS) Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR) Load Factory NVR Settings (DECFNVR) Graphics Sixel Graphic (Chapter 6) ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 63 4.4 LEVEL 1 FUNCTIONS The following sections describe the LA75’s Level 1 escape and control sequences for text processing. 4.4.1 Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) Horizontal pitch determines the width and spacing of printed characters. It is specified in characters per inch. The LA75 has 8 horizontal pitch selections: 5. 6. 8.25, 8.55. 10, 12, 16.5 and 17.1 characters per inch (Figure 4-1). You can use any combination of pitch selections on a single print line. When the horizontal pitch changes (Figure 4-2). the printer converts the active column to the grid of the new horizontal pitch. If the conversion yields a fraction, it is rounded to the next highest integer. This rounding allows printing on the correct column grid for the new pitch. | — You can use the following formula to determine the precise location of the ac- tive column when the horizontal pitch changes. Newcol = 1 + Newpitch x (Oldcol-1) Oldpitch where: Newcol = the new active column, Newpitch = the new pitch in characters per inch, Oldcol = the old active column, and Oldpitch = the old pitch in characters per inch. NOTE: The division performed abouve is integer division. Any nonzero remain- der is rounded to the next higher integer. 64 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE - DECSHORF. set horizontal pirteh This line 15 printed at 12 cpi. This line is printed at 12 cp1. test This lane 13 printed at 10 cpi. This line 15 prainted at 10 cpi. - This line 1s printed at 16.5 cpi. This line is printed at 16.5 cp1. This line is printed at 16.5 cp1. This line 1is printed at 16.5 cp1. This laimne 135 printed at 10 cpa. This line 15 printed at 10 cpi. This line is printed at 17.1 cp1. This line is printed at 17.1 cp1. This line i3 printed at 10 cpai. This line is printed at 10 cp1i. Ty oo = Thhas . W A dm e s iAs mry-amntecd printed at at S S5 Thi=s lime i35 primted at & cpai. This lime is prinmnted at & cpi. This line is printed at 8.25 cpi. This line is printed This line is printed at 8 .55 cpi. This line is printed at 8.55 cpi. 10cpa 12cpi 16.5cpi at 17.0epp HHHHHHHH HHHHHHHH HHHAHHEH S 8.25 oo - - cpi. 4 - oop ol oopi. A Hop i A H A B8.25cpi A A HHHHH B8.55cpi A MA-O293-86 Figure 4-1 Horizontal Pitch Selections 65 m“ \ I I I I I i ] I I I ! | I I | | I I I 1o Y} 8 e T | I | IR~ I PR = | I g | B I " S — o o o S——— o 1 INCH 4 (=] e 1] | [ofelr[]n] | 10 CHARACTERS/INCH 12 CHARACTERS/INCH ‘—04 }0—— FRACTIONAL COMPONENT NEW ACTIVE COLUMN MA-10,085 Figure 4-2 Changing Horizontal Pitch Changing horizontal pitch sets the left and right margin to column 1 and the maximum column at the new horizontal pitch, respectively. Horizontal pitch also determines if single- or double-width character printing occurs. Horizontal Pitch Maxium Characters Character Characters/Inch Per Line Width 66 10 80 Single 12 96 Single 16.5 132 Single 17.1 137 Single 5 40 Double 6 48 Double 8.25 66 Double 8.55 68 Double ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE The printer considers double-width characters to be one column wide (not two columns wide). Therefore, tab stops are reset to the appropriate double-width column grid when horizontal pitch is changed (as with all pitches). The following control sequences set single-width horizontal pitches. Name Mnemonic Set DECSHORPCSI horizontal Sequence Function w Sets pitch to default 9/11 7/7 of 10 char/inch. CSI 0O w Sets pitch to default 9/11 3/0 77 of 10 char/inch. CSI 1 w Sets pitch to 9/11 3/1 117 10 char/inch. CSI 2 w Sets pitch to 9/11 3/2 7/7 12 char/inch. CSI 4 w Sets pitch to 9/11 3/4 7/1 16.5 char/inch. CSI 1 1 9/11 3/1 3/1 pitch Sets pitch to 77 17.1 char/inch. The following control sequences set double-width horizontal pitches. Name Mnemonic Set DECSHORPCSI horizontal Sequence Function 5 w Sets pitch to 9/11 3/5 717 5 char/inch. CSI 6 w Sets pitch to 9/11 3/6 717 6 char/inch. CSI 8 w Sets pitch to 9/11 3/8 717 8.25 char/inch. CSI 1 2 W Sets pitch to 9/11 3/1 3/2 717 8.55 char/inch pitch NOTE: If you use any other parameter values. the printer ignores them. 4.4.2 Vertical Pitch (DECVERP) Vertical pitch determines the spacing between lines of text. Vertical pitch is specified in lines per inch. Changing vertical pitch does not change the height of the printed character or top-of-form position. The printer has six vertical pitch selections: 2. 3. 4. 6. 8, and 12 lines per inch (Figure 4-3). DECVERF: Eight Eight Eight vertical lines per lines per lines per pitch inch inch inch test (Z2). (Z). (2). - Eight Eight Eight limes lines lines per per per inch inch inch (12). (1Z). (12). Six lines per inch (none). Six lines per inch (1) Six Six lines lines per per inch inch (none). (none). Six Bix lines lines per per inch inch (1). (1) TWEIVE 1iREE R RSR HI): Two lines per inch (4). Two lines per inch (14). Two lines per inch (4). Two lines per inch (14). Two lines per inch (4). Two lines per inch (14). << Figt § 1iRSE BER IRGR 13): Three lines per inch (5). Three lines per inch (15). Three lines per inch (5). Three lines per inch (15). Three lines per inch (5). Three lines per inch (15). Four lines per inch (&). Four linmes per inch (16). Four lines per inch (&). Four lines per inch (1&6). Four lines per inch (&6). Four lines per inch (16). MAa-0284-86 Figure 4-3 Vertical Pitch Selections i S 68 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE When you change vertical pitch. the printer converts the active line to the grid of the new vertical pitch. If the conversion yields a fraction. the active line is rounded to the next integer. Then. after receiving a paper motion command. the printer advances the paper to the next line on the new vertical grid. The following control sequences set vertical pitch. Name Mnemonic Sequence Set DECVERP CSI =z Sets pitch to default 9/11 7/10 of 6 lines/inch. CSI O z 9/11 3/0 7/10 CSI 1 z Sets pitch to 9/11 3/1 17/10 6 lines/inch. CSI 2 z Sets pitch to 9/11 3/2 17/10 8 lines/inch. CSI 3 z Sets pitch to 9/11 3/3 17/10 12 lines/inch. CSI 4 z Sets pitch to 9/11 3/4 7/10 2 lines/inch. CSI 5 z Sets pitch to 9/11 3/5 17/10 3 lines/inch. CSI 6 z Sets pitch to 9/11 3/6 7/10 4 lines/inch. vertical Function pitch Same as above 4.4.3 Page Length (DECSLPP) You can select the default page length by the Form Length feature in the setup menu (Section 2.8). The factory setting is 11 inches. An 11-inch page gives you 66 lines at the default vertical pitch of 6 lines per inch. The page length control sequence lets you set the page length by selecting the number of lines (0 to 252) per page at the current vertical pitch. If the distance specified exceeds 21 inches. the printer sets the page length to the maximum of 21 inches. You can select any page length from 1/12 inch to 21 inches with the number of lines at the current vertical pitch. If the page length is set to 0. the printer ignores paging and treats all form feed characters as line feed characters. Table 4-4 shows the lines per page and page length as a function of vertical pitch. Table 4-4 Page Length and Vertical Pitch Page Vertical Pitch Selected (Lines per Inch) Length (Inches) 2 3 4 6 8 12 Lines per Page 3.67 n/a 11 n/a 22 n/a 44 4.25 n/a n/a 17 n/a 34 51 8.5 17 n/a 34 o1 68 102 11 22 33 44 66 88 132 14 28 42 56 84 112 168 21 42 63 84 126 168 252 NOTE: Where n/a is indicated, the particular page length is not available for that vertical pitch selection. If vertical pitch changes after page length has been set. the page may contain a nonintegral number of lines. In this case, the fractional line portion is added to the last full line on that page. For example, suppose you select 22 lines per page at 6 lines per inch, then change the vertical pitch to 8 lines per inch. The form length is 29 lines per page now, with 28 lines at 8 lines per inch and 1 line at 6 lines per inch preserving the selected physical form length of 3.67 inches. 70 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE The following control sequence sets the page length. Name Mnemonic Sequence Set DECSLPP CSI Pn 9/11 *** 7/4 the top-of-form position | and sets the page length page length Function t Sets the active line to to Pn units of the current vertical pitch. 4.4.4 Partial-line Paper Motion (PLD and PLU) The following escape sequences let you advance or reverse paper in 1/12 inch increments. These sequences modify the printer’s active line counter. Name Partial = Mnemonic Sequence (8-bit) (7-bit) PLD ESC K 1/11 4/11 ESC L Line Function Advances paper 1/12 inch. Down Partial Line PLU Reverses paper 1/12 inch. 1/11~ 4/12 Up 4.4.5 Character Set Selection This section describes how to select character sets in both the 7- and 8-bit en- vironments. You can assign and select any of the available character sets in the printer. 4.4.5.1 Select Character Set Sequences (SCS) - The Select Character Set (SCS) escape sequences are used to assign any of the LA75 character sets to the GO, G1. G2. and G3 character set designators. These designators define the contents of the GL and GR printable sets and may be controlled with the single and locking shift command (Paragraph 4.4.5.2). Table 4-5 lists the character sets and SCS sequences. ‘Table 4-5 Assigning Character Sets GO Gl G2 G3 Character Set ESC (B ESC)B ESC*B ESC + B U.S. ASCII ESC (A ESC)A ESC*A ESC+ A ISO Great Britain ESC (5 ESC)5 ESC * 5 ESC + 5 DEC Finland ESC (R ESC)R ESC*R ESC + R ISO France ESC (9 ESC)9 ESC *9 ESC + 9 DEC French Canada ESC (K ESC ) K ESC*K ESC + K ISO Germany ESC(Y ESC)Y ESC*Y ESC+Y ISO Italy ESC (J ESC)J ESC * J ESC + J JIS Roman ESC (1 ESC)I ESC * ESC + 1 JIS Katakana ESC (6 ESC)6 ESC *6 ESC + 6 DEC Norway/Denmark ESC(Z ESC)Z ESC *Z ESC + Z [SO Spain ESC (7 ESC) 7 ESC * 7 ESC + 7 DEC Sweden ESC( < ESC) < ESC* < ESC + <« | ESC (0 ESC)0 ESC * 0 ESC + 0 . ESC( > User-Preference Supplemental DEC VT100 Special Graphic ESC) > ESC* > ESC + > DEC Technical ESC *° ESC + ¢ [SO Norway/Denmark ESC (* ESC)' ESC ( 4 ESC) 4 ESC * 4 ESC + 4 DEC Holland ESC ( = ESC) = ESC* = ESC + = DEC Switzerland" ESC(%6 ESC)%6 ESC* %6 ESC + % 6 DEC Portugal N/A ESC-A ESC . A ISO Supplemental ESC(%5 ESC)% 5 ESC* %5 ESC + % 5 ESC/A DEC Supplemental NOTE: The SCS escape sequences (Table 4-6) select a DEC character set as an error fallback. Digital reserves the right to redefine these sequences in the future to agree with new ISO standards. Digital recommends that you use the sequences above in new application software. rather than the following sequences. 72 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE Table 4-6 Fallback Escape Sequences GO Gl G2 G3 Character Set ESC(C ESC(Q ESC(E ESC(H ESC)C ESC)Q ESC)E ESC)H ESC*C ESC*Q ESC*E ESC*H ESC+C ESC+ Q ESC+ E ESC+H DEC Finland DEC French Canada DEC Norway/Denmark DEC Sweden 4.4.5.2 Single and Locking Shifts - In a 7-bit environment. only the GL active character set is available. Sequences that refer to the GR active character set have no effect in a 7-bit character environment. In an 8-bit environment, the printer uses the GL active character set if a character’s eighth bit is 0, and the GR active character set if the character’s ~ eighth bit is 1. Table 4-7 lists the escape sequences and control characters that assign the available character sets to the active character set (GL or GR). ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 73 Table 4-7 Selecting an Active Character Set Name Mnemonic Sequence Single SS2* ESC N The character following SS2 is 1/11 4/14 selected from the G2 character shift 2 Function set. Single SS3* shift 3 ESC O The character following SS3 is 1/11 4/15 selected from the G3 character set. Shift In SI} | n/a The GO character set becomes the GL active character set. Shift Out SO} n/a The G1 character set becomes the GL active character set. Locking LS24 shift 2 Locking LS34 shift 3 Locking LS1R¢ shift 1 ESC n The G2 character set becomes 1/11 6/14 the GL active character set. ESC o The G3 character set becomes 1/11 6/15 the GL active character set. ESC -~ The G1 character set becomes /11 7/14 the GR active character set. ESC } The G2 character set becomes /11 7/13 the GR active character set. ESC | The G3 character set becomes 1/11 7/12 the GR active character set. right Locking LS2R} shift 2 right Locking LS3R} shift 3 right * SS2 and SS3 only affect the first printable character following the single- shift sequence. The printer executes nonprintable characters (such as the space character. control characters. escape sequences. and control sequences) as usual. In an 8-bit environment. the eighth bit of the printable character following the single shift (§S2 or SS3) is ignored thus providing a character code in - the range of 2/1 to 7/14. The 10/0 character clears the single shift code and Is processed as an error character (¢,). t 74 A locking shift (SI, SO. LS2. LS3, LS1R. LS2R. OR LS3R) remains in effect until the printer receives another locking shift. ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 4.4.5.3 Assign User-Preference Supplemental Character Set (DECAUPSS) When the printer receives the DECAUPSS control string, it assigns the char- acter set defined by the parameter and data in the string as the UserPreference Supplemental (UPS) Character set. By using the appropriate SCS sequence (Table 4-5), you can designate this character set into GO. G1. G2. or G3. On power up, the UPS character set is defined by the UPS feature in the set-up menu (Section 2.8). The DECAUPSS sequence is as follows: DCS Ps ! u D..D ST 9/0 2/1 T7/5 ¥* ** 9/12 *** Ps = 0 or none 94-character set =1 96-character set D....D are the data that include the intermediate and final characters of the SCS sequence used to explicitly select the supplemental character set. Possible data values are: To 53 2/5 3/5 A DEC Supplemental (Ps must be 0) [SO Supplemental (Ps must be 1) JIS Katakana (Ps must be 0) DEC Technical (Ps must be 0) 3/0 I 4/9 > 3/14 4.4.5.4 ANSI Announcer Sequence - The following escape sequences conform to the draft ANSI standard dpANS X3.134.1-19XX, 8-Bit Structures and Rules. and can be used to load ASCII and ISO character sets. ESC SP L Load ASCII set into GO and invoke it /11 2/0 4/12 into GL. Load ISO Supplemental set into G1 and invoke it into GR. ESC SP M 1/11 2/0 4/13 Same as above. ESC SP N Load ASCII set into GO and invoke it /11 2/0 4/14 into GL only. ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 75 4.4.6 Printing Quality Selection (DECDEN) The following control sequences select draft. memo, near letter quality, or letter quality printing (Figure 4-4). The LA75 can print in one of four printing densities: 1. Draft — which is font-generated. 2. Memo — which is created by bolding the draft font text. 3. Near Letter Quality — which is created by dot fill-in of the draft font text. 4. Letter Quality — which is font-generated. Name Mnemonic Sequence Select DECDEN Cst density Function Z Defaults to draft 9/11 2/2 17/10 printing (250 cps). CSI 0 " zZ Defaults to draft 9/11 3/0 2/2 7/10 printing. CSI 1 " z Selects draft 9/11 3/1 2/2 17/10 printing (250 cps). CSI 2 iy z Selects letter 9/11 3/2 2/2 17/10 quality (LQ) printing (32 cps). CSI 3 y z Selects memo printing 9/11 3/3 2/2 7/10 (125 cps). CSI 4 " Z Selects near letter 9/11 3/4 2/2 17/10 quality (NLQ) printing (42 cps). NOTE: If you use any other parameter values. the printer will ignore the sequence. 76 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE m Dratt of Draft printing. This is an example “ Memo This is an example of Memo printing. NLG This 1s an example of NLQ@ printing. is an example of LQ printing. LO This MA-0166-868 Figure 4-4 Print Quality Examples 4.4.7 Highlighting Your Printing (SGR) There are two Select Graphic Rendition (SGR) sequences that you can use to highlight the printing text. ANSI-standard SGR sequence lets you highlight using bolding, underlining, double underlining, and italics. DEC Private SGR controls superscript, subscript, and overline printing. 4.4.7.1 Select Graphic Rendition (SGR) Sequence - One or more SGR high- light attributes may be specified in one sequence. All printable characters following the SGR sequence are printed using the selected highlighting features. until the next SGR sequence. The printer evaluates Ps parameters sequentially from left to right. Name Mnemonic Sequence Select SGR CSI Ps ; : Ps m 9/11 *** 3/11 3/11 *** /13 graphic rendition Ps Function 0 or none Turns off bold, italics, underline, and (3/0) double underline printing. 1(3/1) Turns on bold printing. 3 (3/3) Turns on italics printing. 4 (3/4) Turns on underline printing. Turns off double underline printing if selected (Paragraph 4.12.1). 21 (3/2 3/1) Turns on double underline printing. Turns off underline printing if selected. 22 (3/2 3/2) Turns off bold printing. 23 (3/2 3/3) Turns off italics printing. 24 (3/2 3/4) Turns off underline and double underline printing. I you selected to bold the text while using memo-quality printing (SGR=1) the printer performs bolding by overprinting the text. When you enter graphic mode, the printer stores the current parameter values for the SGR sequence. When you return to text mode, the printer uses these parameters. The printer ignores all other parameter values received in this control sequence. but still executes the valid parameter values. The printer executes the parameters in the order received. 78 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 4.4.7.2 DEC Private SGR Sequence - You can use the DEC Private SGR se- - quence to print superscript and subscript characters or to highlight with an ? overline. | - CSI | Ps =0 or none 9/11 ? 3/156 Ps *** - ; 3/11 ces Ps *¥*¥* m 6/13 Turns off superscripting. subscripting. and overline printing. — Ps =4 | Turns on superscripting and turns off 3/4 - subscripting if it was selected. =5 Turns on subscripting and turns off 3/5 - superscripting if it was selected. =6 Turns on overline. 3/6 = - 3/2 - =2 2 = 4 3/2 Turns off superscripting and subscripting. 3/4 6 Turns off overline. 3/6 All DEC Private SGR parameters are retained while in the Graphic mode. When you enter this mode. the printer stores the current parameter values for . the SGR sequence. When you return to the text mode, the printer uses these parameters. Superscripted and subscripted text characters are printed at half-height on the - active line. The printer does not change horizontal and vertical pitch in this case. 4.4.8 Automatic Sheet Feeder [f the printer is equipped with the automatic sheet feeder (ASF), you can use the DECASFC control sequence to insert and eject cut sheet paper. Name Mnemonic Sequence ASF Control DECASFC CSI Ps ! v 9/11 *** 2/1 17/6 I[f Ps = 0 or none, eject current page: = 1, insert next sheet: > 1, same as Ps = 1. When the LA75 receives the insert command. it first ejects the current sheet (if already inserted). When the LA75 receives the eject command. it ejects the current sheet into the output bin and stops. NOTE: When the ASF is not installed. the printer interprets the DECASFC command as a Form Feed control. 4.4.8.1 Other ASF Control Functions - In addition to the DECASFC com- mand. the following conditions and commands also control automatic operation of the sheet feeder. Feature Paper Sheet Installed No Paper FF control code Ejects current sheet Inserts new sheet received. and inserts new sheet. only. Active position Waits for printable Waits for printable advances beyond character. then ejects character, then bottom margin. current sheet and inserts new sheet. inserts next sheet. FF switch (on Ejects current sheet Inserts new sheet. Performs line feed. No action the front panel) pressed. LF switch (on the front panel) pressed. On power up Ejects paper only. Waits for printable waits for printable character. then character. then Inserts new sheet. inserts new sheet. 80 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 4.4.8.2 ASF Error Conditions - If an ASF error is detected and DSR unsoli- cited reporting is enabled (Section 5.5), the LA75 sends the error code 32 to the host computer. The error may be caused by one of the following conditions. 1. No paper is detected during the insertion. 2. The sheet feeder is unable to eject paper. If the printer cannot detect paper during the insertion or is unable to eject paper, it becomes de-selected and the READY indicator goes off. If you then press the READY switch, the printer turns on the READY indicator and again attempts to insert paper and continue operation. 4.5 LEVEL 2 FUNCTIONS The following sections describe LA75’s Level 2 functions, escape and control sequences for text processing. When set as a Level 2 device (LA210compatible), the LA75 provides all Level 1 and Level 2 functions. 4.5.1 Set Page Width Alignment (DECHPWA) The user may define the limits of the print area. This limit will not change. unless modified by another DECHPWA command. | The print area (Figure 4-5) shows absolute limits to center text on the platen. This area is the base reference for horizontal positioning and is expressed in inches. The following DECHPWA sequence sets the left reference and print area width. | CSI Pnl ; Pn2 " S 9/11 *** 3/11 *** 2/2 7/3 The first parameter (Pnl) defines the absolute left reference in 1/12 inch incre- ments (measured from the leftmost position of the printhead). The second pa- rameter (Pn2) defines the absolute width of the print area in 1/12-inch increments. Limits on Pnl and Pn2 are as follows: Pnl = 0 to 95 [f Pnl is greater than 95, value of 95 is used. Pnl changes the physical location of column 1 and tabs. Pn2 = 1 to 96 (Pnl + Pn2) must not be greater than 96 (8 inches). — If Pnl + Pn2 is greater than 96. the Pn2 value is equal to 96 minus Pnl value. Pn2 must be at least 1 in order to define a printable area. Pn2 defines the new rightmost printable position. The column value of the horizontal tabs remains unchanged by DECHPWA. - The physical locations of the horizontal tabs shift by the same amount as the left reference shift. [t the active position is less than the new column 1, the printer sets the active position to the new column 1. If the active postion is greater than the new rightmost printable position. the action of the next printable character is deter- mined by the right margin (Autowrap/Truncate) setting. NOTE: This sequence clears the previously set left and right margins. The left margin is set to the new column 1, while the right margin is set to the rightmost position defined by Pnl and Pn2 (left reference and width). 82 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE P PAPER . (USER INSTALLED) MARGINS AND TABS ARE COLUMN ORIENTED AN AN “.\\ L\ N, N\ TAB N SETTING v\ A\ AREA/ ARv PRINT (USER DEFINED \ \.% \\ | IN INCHES) e MA - 010086 Figure 4-5 Print Area and Horizontal Settings ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 83 4.5.2 Set Left and Right Margins (DECSLRM) The left and right margins define the limits for the carriage return and end-ofline (wrap/truncate) functions (Figure 4-5). These left and right margins are column-oriented and modified by the following explicit and implicit commands. Explicit 1. Set margins. 2. Reset to the factory default. [mplicit L. Set horizontal pitch (clears margins). 2. Set print width alignment (clears margins). The following sequence sets the left and right margins. CSI 9/11 Pl *** . 3/11 Pr *** s 7/3 The left margin specifies the first printable position on a line while the right margin specifies the last printable position on a line. The LA75 prints only within the left and right margins inclusive. Therefore, the active position may not be placed outside the left and right margins. Pl is the left margin setting. This is a numeric value representing the number of columns from the leftmost position at which to set the left margin. At power on, the printer sets Pl to the leftmost position (column 1). Pr is the right margin setting. This is a numeric value representing the number of columns from the leftmost position at which to set the right margin. On power on. the printer sets Pr to the rightmost position {(column 80 at 10 characters/inch). If Pl = 0 or none, no change is made to the left margin. If Pr = 0 or none. no change is made to the right margin. I[f Pr > the rightmost printable position. the printer sets the right margin at the right-most printable position. [f 84 Pl > Pr. the printer ignores the command. ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE s If the active position is less than the left margin specified by this command. then the printer sets the active position to the new left margin. If the active position is greater than the right margih specified by this com- mand. then the action of the next printable character is determined by the right margin (Autowrap/Truncate) setting. If you change the horizontal pitch. this will reset the left and right margin to their printable limits (column 1 and rightmost position. respectively). If you redefine the print area. this resets the margins. 4.5.3 Horizontal Tabs Horizontal tabs are column-oriented. predefined positions on the print line (Figure 4-5). The printer has a maximum of 137 possible horizontal tab stops. one for each column at 17.1 characters/inch. Tab stops are associated with column numbers that relate to the print area, not physical positions on the paper. So, when you change the horizontal pitch. the physical positions of the tab stops also change. You can set or clear tab stops independently or in groups. You can set stops or clear them, regardless of margins or horizontal pitch. However. setting a stop already set has no effect; the same is true for clearing a stop already cleared. At power up, there is one horizontal tab setting at every eighth column. The following sequences set or clear horizontal tab stops. 4.5.3.1 Horizontal Tabulation Set Control Code (HTS) - ESC H 1/11 4/8 HTS C1 control code is 8/8. Sets a horizontal tab stop at the active column. 4.5.3.2 Set Horizontal Tabulation Stops (DECSHTS) cCSst Pn ;... .. . Pn u 9/11 **% 3/11 3/11 ***x 7/5 This sequence sets a horizontal tab stop at the specified Pn columns. You can specify up to 16 tab stops in any order within one sequence. The maximum number of tab stops is 137 per line. If Pn is greater than 137, the printer ignores this parameter. 4.5.3.3 Horizontal Tabulation Set (DECHTS) ESC 1 /11 3/1 Sets a horizontal tab stop at the active column. NOTE: This sequence is provided for compatibility with previous products. It may not be supported in future products and is not recommended. 4.5.3.4 Tabulation Clear (TBC) ST CSI O g 9/11 3/0 6/7 Clears a horizontal tab at the active column. CSI 2 g 9/11 3/2 6/7 Clears all horizontal tab stops. CSI 3 g 9/11 3/3 6/7 T Clears all horizontal tab stops. SRR 86 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 4.5.3.5 Clear All Horizontal Tabs (DECCAHT) ESC 2 /11 3/2 Clears all horizontal tab stops. NOTE: This sequence is included for backward compatibility only and should be used in new products. 4.5.4 Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM) The top vertical margin specifies the first printable line. The bottom vertical margin specifies the limit for the last printable line (Figures 4-6 and 4-7). The LA75 prints only on the lines between the top and bottom margins. inclusive. Depending on vertical pitch. the printing may or may not be allowed exactly at the bottom margm If you try to set the active line above the top margin or below the bottom margin, the active line advances automatically to the top margin of the next page. For example, a line feed (LF) received at the bottom margin causes the printer to perform a form feed. When you set the top and bottom margins. first make sure the distance be- tween the top of form and the desired margin is a multiple of the vertical pitch selected. If not, change the vertical pitch. When you use the following DECSTBM sequence, set Pnl and Pn2 equal to the desired margins in inches. multiplied by the current vertical pitch in lines per inch. ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 87 s FORM LENGTH BOTTOM MARGIN (LAST PRINTABLE LINE) FORM PERFORATION L s Figure 4-6 Form Length and Vertical Settings The following sequence sets the top and bottom margins. CSI Pt . Pb r 9/11 ** 3/11 ** 7/2 Pt is the top margin setting. This is a numeric value representing the number of lines from the top of form at which to set the top margin. At power up. Pt is equal to top of form (line 1). A 88 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE Pb is the bottom margin setting. This is a numeric value representing the num- ber of lines from the topmost position on a page at which to set the bottom margin. At power up. Pb is equal to the bottommost position (line 66 at 6 Ipi). If Pt equals O or none, no change is made to the top margin. If Pb equals 0 or none, no change is made to the bottom margin. If Pb is greater than the current form length., the LA75 sets the bottom margin to the last print line of the form. I[f Pt is greater than Pb, the printer ignores this command. [f the active position is less than Pt, the printer sets the active position to the new top margin specified by the Pt value. If the active position is greater than the new bottom margin. the active line immediately moves to the top margin on the next page. If the VPA and VPR commands (Paragraphs 4.5.6.8 and 4.5.6.9) cause the ac- tive position to move off the current page. the next printable character moves the active line to the top margin of the next page. | If the LA75 receives a LF while at the bottom margin. or when less than 1 line remains on the page. the printer sets the active line to the top margin of the next page. When you change the page length. the top margin is reset to line 1 and the bottom margin is set to the bottom-most position of the new page length. You can print one superscript character with the PLU command if the active line is at the top margin. If the printer receives more PLU commands. they are ignored. You can print one subscript character with the PLD command if the active line is at the bottom margin. If the printer receives more PLD commands. they are ignored. When you change the vertical pitch. the physical position of the top and bot- tom margins do not change relative to the new vertical pitch. Line spacing beginning with the top margin corresponds to the new vertical pitch. FORM je [ o [ o 1234567890abcdefghij o 1/2in.| 50TTOM MARGIN [° 1/3 ifl © o h """""" y : . hd o 1234567890abcdefghij ] & |o 1234567890abcdefghij -] L 123456 7890abcdefghij - -® ° 3LPITO2LPI o | i | i i i [ i i ] i |o : 1234567890abcdefghij . o 1234567890abcdefghij o S | L] o 1234567890abcdefghij 00 -] o 1234567890abcdefghij o r 1/3 in. N1/2§ I i EQUAL OR - GREATER THAN 1/2 INCH oicoo oo oo onD O 00 1/2in.| " 0,000 C0 0O OOC O S0 0O 1/3in. } TOP MARGIN | TOP OF FORM l-? 1234567890abcdefghij 1234567890abcdefghij UNUSED 1234567890abcdefghij 0,00000000000 00 o060 HA SWITCHING FROM 3 LPI o 2 NOTE: ALWAYS START PRINTING AT TOP MARGIN OR AT SOME DISTANCE FROM TOP MARGIN THAT IS A MULTIPLE OF THE CURRENT VERTICAL PITCH. NEVER PRINT BELOW BOTTOM MARGIN. MA-0281.-86 Figure 4-7 Top/Bottom Margins and Pitches R 4.5.5 Vertical Tabs The printhead advances to a preselected line when the printer receives a vertical tab control character (Figure 4-6). The printer has 252 maximum possible vertical tab positions. You can set and clear vertical tabs the same way as hori- zontal tabs. Vertical tab stops are associated with specific line numbers. not physical posi- tions on the paper. So. changing vertical pitch changes the printing position of vertical tabs on the paper. At power up. vertical tabs are set at every line. The R following sequences set or clear vertical tab stops. Fo 90 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 4.5.5.1 Vertical Tab Set Control Code (VTS) ESC J 1/11 4/10 VTS C1 control code is 8/10. Sets a vertical tab stop at the active line. NOTE: If activé line is not at an integer line number due to a PLU or PLD command, the printer sets the tab stop at the next integer line. 4.5.5.2 Vertical Tab Set (DECVTS) ESC 3 /11 3713 Sets a vertical tab stop at the active line. (See the Note in the paragraph above.) NOTE: This sequence is provided for compatibility with previous products. It may not be supported in future products and is not recommended. 4.5.5.3 Set Vertical Tab Stops (DECSVTS) CSI Pn ; 9/11 *** 3/11 .. ; Pn v 3/11 *** 7/g Sets vertical tab stop at the specified Pn. You can specify up to 16 vertical tab stops in one sequence: the maximum number of vertical tab stops is 252. If Pn is greater than 252. the printer ignores this parameter. 4.5.5.4 Tabulation Clear (TBC) CSI 1 g 9/11 3/1 6/7 Clears one vertical tab at the active line (see Note in Paragraph 4.5.5.1). CSI 4 g 9/11 3/4 6/7 Clears all vertical tab stops. 4.5.5.5 Clears All Vertical Tabs (DECCAVT) ESC 4 /11 3/4 - Clears all vertical tab stops. NOTE: This sequence is provided for compatibility with previous products. It may not be supported in future products and is not recommended. i 4.5.6 Active Column And Active Line Commands In addition to the Level 1 control characters listed in Chapter 3, the following Level 2 control functions affect active column and active line. 4.5.6.1 Forward Index Control Code (IND) ESC D 1/11 4/4 IND C1 control code is 8/4 Performs a Line Feed (LF) function. This sequence is not affected by the Line Feed New Line Mode (LNM) or T Automatic Carriage Return settings in the set-up menu (Section 2.8). 4.5.6.2 Next Line Control Code (NEL) ESC E 1/11 4/5 NEL C1 control code is 8/5 Sets the active column to the left margin and increments the active line. g 92 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 4.5.6.3 Autowrap Mode (DECAWM) CSI ? 7 h 9/11 3/16 3/7 6/8 Sets Autowrap mode. CSI ? 7 1 9/11 3/16 3/ 6/12 Resets to Truncate mode. The power-up status of this function is selected with the right margin feature in the set-up menu (Section 2.8). If the Autowrap mode is set and the active position is beyond the right margin, all of the printable characters that follow this command are printed on the next line starting at the left margin. If the Autowrap mode is reset (off), all print- able characters received beyond the right margin are ignored (truncated). 4.5.6.4 Carriage Return New Line Mode (DECCRNLM) CSI ? 4 0 h 9/11 3/15 3/4 3/0 6/8 Sets CR New Line mode. CSI ? 4 0 1 9/11 3/15 3/4 3/0 6/12 Resets CR New Line mode. The power-up status of this function is set through the Automatic Line Feed feature in the set-up menu (Section 2.8). The Carriage Return New Line Mode defines the function of Carriage Return (CR). If this function is set and a CR is received, the printer sets the active position at the left margin of the next line. If the function is reset and a CR is received, the printer returns the active position to column 1 of the current line. 4.5.6.5 Linefeed New Line Mode (LNM) CSI 2 0 h 9/11 3/2 3/0 6/8 Sets LF New Line mode. CSI 2 0 l 9/11 3/2 3/0 6/12 Resets LF New Line mode. - The power-up status of this function is set through the Automatic Carriage Return feature in the set-up menu (Section 2.8). The Linefeed New Line Mode defines the function of Line Feed (LF). If LNM is set and a LF character is received, the printer advances the active position to the left margin of the next line. If LNM is reset and a LF is received, the o printer advances the active position to the same column on the next line. 4.5.6.6 Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA) S CSI Pn ‘ 9/11 ¥**¥* 6/0 Sets the active column to column Pn. It Pn is greater than the right margin. the active position moves beyond the right margin. If Pn is less than or equal to the left margin, the active column moves to the left margin. | 4.5.6.7 Horizontal Position Relative (HPR) CSI Pn a 9/11 k% G/1 Advances the active column by Pn columns. If the active column plus Pn is greater than the right margin, the active posi- tion moves beyond the right margin. 94 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 4.5.6.8 Vertical Position Absolute (VPA) CSI 9/11 Pn d *** §G/4 Sets the active line to line Pn. If the Pn positimh is below the bottom margin, the next printable character causes the active line to move to the top margin of the next page. If the Pn position is less than the active line, the next printable character advances the active line to the top margin of the next page. 4.5.6.9 Vertical Position Relative (VPR) CSI Pn e 9/11 *** 6/5 Advances the active line by Pn lines. If the active line plus Pn is greater than the bottom margin. the next printable character causes the active line to move to the top margin of the next page. 4.5.7 Unidirectional/Bidirectional Printing (DECUPM) In Text mode, printing occurs in either a unidirectional (left-to-right) or bidirectional pattern. In Graphic mode, printing is done unidirectionally ONLY. The following sequences control printing direction. CSlI 9/11 ? 3/15 4 3/4 1 3/1 h 6/8 Sets to unidirectional (left to right) printing. CSI ? 4 1 | 9/11 3/15 3/4 3/1 6/12 Sets to bidirectional printing. 4.5.8 Downline-Loadable Character Set The LA75 allows you to create up to 96 unique characters that you can store for future use. These user-defined characters create a Dynamically Redefinabl e Character Set (DRCS). You can load this character set into the font memory of the printer and subsequently designate and invoke it as a regular resident char- acter set. Once the fontis loaded. the printer processes the user-defmed characters in the same way as all other character sets. The fonts may consist of 94- or 96-character sets that are loaded into the printer buffer using the downline-load (DECDLD) control string. The 94-character set may include characters in positions from 2/1 through 7/14. - The 96-character set may include characters in positions from 2/0 through 7/15. On printer power down. the loaded DRCS character sets are lost. 4.5.8.1 Designing a Character Set - You can design characters for your char- acter set by defining a pixel bit pattern for each character. The pixel is the smallest element of a picture (individual dot on the paper). Each pixel in a character font is represented by a bit with a binary value of 1 (on) or 0 (off). One (1) specifies foreground (printing) and zero (0) specifies background (no printing). Pixel bit patterns are loaded in a font using sixels. Each sixel specifies one vertical column of six pixels. For example, to design the character A using 7 x 10 character cell. you have to designate which pixels are to be printed. Figure 4-8 shows Character A pattern. —*{7 PIXELS [+— I (O NORGRORGHORG. (ORGRORORGR § N6 l NORsE E X X ROR®) 10 PIXELS SRSl R X R JORe (ORCRSRONON X RO (ONCRORGROR RN (ORORORGROR RORO) CNORONORSR NON CO0O®O00 Figure 4-8 Pixel Pattern for Character A s 96 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE After you establish what your character A is going to look like, you then break | the pixels in this character cell into sixels as shown in Figure 4-9. The column numbers here designate the order in which the sixels will be sent to the printer. In each column (sixel), the least significant bit corresponds to the top pixel and the most significant bit corresponds to the bottom pixel. Because the character height (10 pixels) is not a multiple of six, the columns on the bottom of the character cell consist of only four bits each. (The two highest order bits, b4 and b5, are ignored.) 1234567 bo |00 OO0 OCOO bt loooeo oo b2 looe o e 0o o] UPPER b3 loecooeo COLTMMS, b4 l@mcocoo0o00e b (e o @0 e e e bO |l®e c0o0 0O e bt |lec oo oo el b2 lo LOWER o0 o000 0] COLUMNS b3 looooooo 4 9101112131415 M A-OBS 1-83 Figure 4-9 Character A in Sixel Pattern After you have broken the designed character into sixels. you can convert the binary values of each sixel to its equivalent character. Because sixel column codes are restricted to characters with the range of ? (3/15) to ~ (7/14), you must add an offset of hexadecimal 3/15 (decimal 63) to each sixel column value. Thus, binary value 000000 is converted to hexadecimal 3/15, binary 110101 is coverted to hexadecimal 7/4 (3/5 + 3/15), and binary 111111 is converted to hexadecimal 7/14 (3/15 + 3/15). After converting the binary sixel codes to hexadecimal values (using the offset), you then convert the resultant value for each sixel to its equivalent character using the ASCII table in Figure 3-1. Figure 4-10 shows the conversion procedure for the sample character A. After you desigx}ed your DRCS character set using the conversion procedure described, you can then downline-load these characters using the DECDLD de- vice control string. ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 97 4.5.8.2 DECDLD Control String - The downline-load control string consists of the Device Control String (DCS) introducer and protocol selector followed by the Select Character Set (Dscs) command string. The introducer and protocol selector format is as follows: DCS Pfn ; Pen 9/10 *** 3/11 *** Pss ; ¥ 3/11 Pu , *** 3/11 3/11 Pe ; *** 3/11 *** Pemw; Pcmh ; Pess | *¥* *** 3/11 3/11 3/11 The Dscs string format is as follows: Dscs Sxbpl Sxbp2 ... Sxbpn ST 4.5.8.2.1 DCS Introducer Parameters - The introducer and protocol selective sequence parameters control the operation of the font load function. If a param- eter is omitted, it is replaced by the default value. DCS - 9/0 Device Control String Introducer DCS is an 8-bit control character that initiates the DECDLD control string. DCS can also be expressed as ESC P (1/11 5/0) in 7-bit coding. Pfn - Font Number This parameter specifies the DRCS buffer to be loaded. The LA75 has only one DRCS font buffer. You can use two values. 0 and 1 (default) to load this DRCS buffer. The printer ignores DECDLD sequences that attempt to load any other buffer. Pen - Starting Character Number , This parameter selects the location of the first character in the font buffer to be loaded. Parameter value 0 starts loading at character location 2/0. parameter value 1 at character location 2/1. Value 95 starts loading at character location 7/15. (Refer to ASCII table in Figure 3-1.) | If more than one character is to be loadled, the locations are filled ; consecutively, starting with Pcn. until the last legal location is reached. NOTES: 1. If the Character Set Size parameter (Pcss) is 0 (94-character set), the 2. If the Pcss parameter is 1 (96-character set), the default value for default value for Pcn is 1 (2/1). Pcn is 0 (2/0). 98 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES Pe - Erase Control g A This parameter determines which previously loaded characters are erased while new characters are loaded into the buffer. Valid Pe param&ters are. 0 = erase all charactersin the DI LCS set (d@fault} 1 = erase only the characters that arebeingloac 2 = erase all charactersin the DRCS set me cm use P:e value 1 to cha \rsr one m' mwm chamcters in the Spec & chg mcwrs Characters that are eramd and am nm: wdfihmd are m*m; as error characters (x). Pemw - | Character Cell Width This parameter defines the width (in pmels) of the chamcter cell matrix. Some values also specify cell height. For example, if you use 2 as the width parameter. the cell heightis set to 10, takmg prece- denm wer any &pemfled Pflfllh C@ll Hetght) pmamemr in the sequerme | Pcmw values are as follows: '0 = 9 (device default - LA75 Standard Text width) = not used (DECDLD sequence is xgnured) = 5(W) x 10(H) 3=6 x 10 | 4=17x10 9 = (LA75 Standard Text width) 10 =10 11 =11 (LA75 Full Cell width) If the Pcmw value is greater than 11, the printer uses value 11 and truncates pixels beyond 11. If you change the Pcmw parameter from a previous DECDLD se- quence the enmre user—defined DRCS set mrmmly loaded in the oad se rted. If you make an xllagal s&lectmn fm‘ the Pamw pa mmmm th@prmter will ignore the mmamdm' of the load sequence. | Pss - Font Set Size The LA75 ignores this parameter. Pu Font Usage This parameter allows software to treat the font as a text font or a full-cell font. Full-cell fonts are 11 pixels wide by 12 pixels high (LA75 maximum cell size); text-cell fonts are 9 by 9 (standard cell size). The Pu parameter effectively defines the absolute cell size limits of the DRCS font. Character cell size defined by Pemw and Pcmh must fit within these limits. Loaded sixel data which exceeds the limits set by the Pu. Pcmw. and Pcmh parameters is truncated. Pu values are: 0 = text (default) 1 = text 2 = tull cell If you change the Pu parameter from a previous DECDLD sequence. the entire user-defined DRSC set currently loaded in the buffer is erased and a new load sequence is started. Pemh - Character Cell Height This parameter defines the height (in pixels) of the character cell matrix. Pcmh values are as follows: 0 = 9 (default - LA75 Standard Text height, pixels) =1 2=2 3 =3 4 = 4 o =39 =6 7=17 8=8 9 = 9 (LA75 Standard Text height) 10 =10 11 =11 12 = 12 (LA75 Full Cell height) If the Pcmh value is greater than 12, the LA75 uses value 12 and truncates pixels beyond it. | If you Change this parameter from a previous DECDLD sequence. the entire current DRSC set is erased and a new load is started. 100 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE Pcss - Character Set Size - This parameter defines the size of the character set associated with the downline-loaded font according to: Pcss values are as follows: 0 = 94-character set (default), and 1 = 96-character set. This parameter must be consistent with the selection of the Pcn parameter. If you set Pcn to 0 in order to load a character at location 2/0. you must define a 96-character set by setting Pcss to 1. Likewise, if you want to load a character into location 7/15. you must set Pcss to 1 to designate a 96-character set. ! - 7/11 Final character This character signals the end of the parameter list and specifies the Downline-load (DECDLD) function. The data following this final character up to the ST character must be in the 2/0 to 7/14 range and represents the actual font load command string. 4.5.8.2.2 DECDLD Dscs Command String - This string controls the actual loading of sixel data for the specified characters in the selected character set. The Dscs command string has the form: Dscs Dscs - Sxbpl Sxbp2 Sxbpn ST * % % * kK *k 9/12 Select Character Set (SCS) This SCS designation string defines the character set “name” for the loaded font, and is used in an SCS escape sequence (see Paragraph 4.4.5.1) to invoke the font after it is loaded. The Dscs format is I I F. The designation string is a set of up to three ANSI intermediate characters (2/0 through 2/15), followed by a final character (3/0 through 7/14). The ihtermediate and final characters define the intermediate and final characters used in SCS escape sequences (Table 4-4). For example: If Dscs = B, a loaded 94-character font replaces the US ASCII set. If Dscs = sp @, the loaded font is defined as an unused DRCS set. (This Dscs value is recommended for user-defined sets.) ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE 101 You can load the Dscs-assigned fonts into GO Gl G2. and G3 using the appropriate SCS sequences as fmlmWfl ESC( Dscs —> GO ESC) Dscs —> Gl " ESC * Dscs —> G2 SRl ESC + Dscs —> G3 g ESC- Dscs —> Gl ESC. Dscs —> G2 ESC/ 9'4-chamm;@r wt 96-character set | T Dscs —>G3 g Note that the correct SCS sequence depends on the set size of the loaded font (94 or 96 chamcters). , start ed. Sxbp Sixel Bit Patterns The sixel bit patterns defineeach downline-loaded character. The bit | pattema that define mdmdual ehmw:mrs aresepars ted by the ”:” character (3/8). Each sixel bit pattern has the fmm S...S/S...S where first S...S represents the upper columns (sixels) of the DRCS character, the slash (2/5) advances the sixel pattern to the lower columns (sixels) of the DRCS character. and the semnd S...S repre- sents the lmwar srmi& of th& DRCS chamcmr i If no sixel dm,aisfipecm fm: a ,;,.rtm 5,,sim' ehammm wcmmn (no data exists between the ”: ;” delimiters)in the data string, that character is not loaded. If a chamfiter aImMy amsts at that location and its erasure has nm been Sp&cxfifflf m the & f’mnca, the character " is retainedin theloade d set. | - If the loaded sixel data exceeds the specified chamcmr width or height, only those pixels beymd the limits are 1gmred If the sixel data does not completely fill a character cell, the mmsmg pixels are set to zero (no printing). ST 9/12 - | | Sming Terminator This is an 8-bit control chamcter that indicates the end of the device control string. This charmteris equivalent to the 7-bit ESC \ (1/11 5/12) 86@1.1%% - = Lo 4.5.8.3 Emmpm of UEC'LD Control String - ‘Q;%“ you want to load a character set with the example character A Mmgned at the beginning of this section as the first character. To d(} this, you have to enter the following device control string (Figure 4-10). DCS 1;1;1;4;;2::0 { B ogcacgo/B?????B; (next character);... ST DCS — mtmdums the sequence. 1;1;1;4;;2;;,0 — specxfmg loading of the DRCS font buffer number 1. selects the starting character as character 2/1, selects the erasure of only the characters that are to be loaded, selects character cell size (7 x 10), selects the full-cell font size, and selects the size of the chamcmr set (94 characters). { — indicates the end of the parameter characters and specifies that this is a DECDLD control string. B — defines the loaded font as U. S. ASCII set. ogcacgo — are the sixel character codes for tha upper columns of the example , character A. | — advances the sixel seqwnce to tlw lwwmm::»lumnfia : M '~:,:~t;he character A. chamcter A. ; — separates DRCS characters in the set. ST — indicates the end of the device control string. 1 o| 2 o 3 4 O 5 e 6 O 7 ® O O ® O ® ® o O O ® @ e ® O ® ® % ® e e O O o ® i ° ] ® | . | ® | O ® o o O ® ® ® ® SAME SAME SAME AS AS AS COLUMN 3 COLUMN 2 COLUMN 1 100010, 2 = 42q; 42o+77¢ = 141, =a =42g; 42g+77g 8 > 100100,=44g; 44g+77g =143g =c Le 101000 mSO . 50gq 2 8’ — 9 T 110000, 2 °v8 + 77 8 = 147 8 =g = 60gq; 60g + 77q = 1574 =0 8’ °¥8 8 8 10 O 1 o| 12 O 13 oN 14 o} ® O O O @) O O O O O O o O O O O O O — S—— —_— SAME AS SAME AS SAME AS SAME AS SAME AS COLUMN COLUMN COLUMN COLUMN COLUMN 10 10 10 10 9 | MA-0652-83 Figure 4-10 Column Codes for Example 80-Column Font ”“A” Character 104 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR TEXT MODE STATUS, REPORT AND RESET SEQUENCES This chapter desifi;cribes the escape and control sequence you can use to select certain compatibilty modes, request status reports, and reset the printer. 5.1 IBM PROPRINTER EMULATION MODE (DECIPEM) The LA75 powers on to operate in the DEC protocol mode. You can also set the LA75 to run in the IBM Proprinter emulation mode (see Part 3 for IBM Emulation Mode description). The DEC and OTHER protocol indicators on the front panel always show the current mode of operation where OTHERis the IBM Proprinter Emulation mode. You can use the DECIPEM control sequence as follows: Mnemonics Sequence DECIPEM ESC | 1/11 5/11 3/15 3/5 5 ? 8 h 3/8 6/8 Enter IBM Proprinter Emulation mode from DEC mode. The printer will not reset to its initial conditions in the IBM Emulation Mode but will maintain the same conditions that were present when IBM Emulation Mode was last exited. DECIPEM ESC 1/11 [ 5/11 ? 3/15 5 3/5 8 3/8 1 6/12 Exit IBM Proprinter Emulation mode and return to DEC mode. NOTE: Do NOT use the CSI control character when the printer is in IBM | Emulation mode. 105 After the printer exits the IBM emulation mode, it returns to DEC-compatible text mode maintaining the same conditions that were present before DECcompatible mode was exited. These settings include the following: Horizontal and Vertical Pitch (SGR) Attributes Print Density Form Length Top and Bottom Margins Print Area | - Horizontal and Vertical Tabs DSR Solicited/Unsolicited Active Character Sets (GL. GR, GO — G3) When you enable the IBM emulation mode or return to the DEC mode, the paper advances to the next top-of-form. NOTE: You can also use the front panel protocol switch or the set-up menu (Sections 2.7 and 2.8) to set IBM or DEC emulation modes. 5.2 SET CONFORMANCE LEVEL (DECSCL) You can select the functional conformance level (Level 1 or Level 2) that provides interface compatibility with other Digital equipment. Section 4.4 gives a description of Levels 1 and 2 functions. The DECSCL control sequence is as follows. CSI Ps " p 9/11 *** 2/2 7/0 Ps =7 3/7 1 Resets the printer to initial state and 3/1 enables the conformance Level 1 functions. Enables Level 2 device attribute (DA) response (Section 5.3). =17 3/7 2 Resets the printer to initial state and 3/2 enables Level 1 and Level 2 functions. Enables Level 2 device attribute (DA) response. All other Ps values are ignored. The Printer ID feature in the set-up menu determines the printer's con- formance level and device attribute (DA) response at power up. 106 STATUS, REPORT AND RESET SEQUENCES 5.3 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION:. DEVICE ATTRIBUTES (DA) SEQUENCES The printer sends a reply to a mqwest from the computer for primary or secondary device attributes. The printer sends the reply after printing all data received before the DA request. You select the reply sequences through the setup menu by setting the Printer ID feature (Section 2.8). There are three device IDs — LA50, LA210, and Conformance Level 2. The printer responds with one of the three appropriate DA reply sequences. 5.3.1 Primary Device Attributes The device attribute response depends on the prmter mdenmfimtmn (ID) selected through the set-up menu. The reply sequences provide prmter ID and option identifications. DA Request from Computer DA reply from printer CSI 0 ¢ 9/11 3/0 6/3 or CSI c 9/11 6/3 Printer ID = LA50 ESC | ? 1 1/11 5/11 3/156 3/1 3/7 7 ¢ 6/3 The printer sends LA50 reply (1 7). Printer ID = LA210 - ESC | ? 1/11 5/11 3/15 1 0 3/1 3/0 3/11 3 ¢ 3/3 6/3 The printer sends LA210 reply (1 0). Printer ID = Level 2 ESC | ? 7 2 1/11 5/11 3/156 3/7 3/2 Ps3 ; 7 c *** 3/11 3/7 6/3 5 3/11 3/5 3/11 First parameter (7 2) confirms Level 2. Second parameter (5) indicates that the Katakana character set is available. STATUS, REPORT AND RESET SEQUENCES 107 ‘The third parameter (Ps3) may be 6 (3/6), indicating that the sheet feeder is available. (This parameter is sent only if the sheet feeder is installed.) The fourth parameter is always 7 (3/7). indicating that the downline-loading (DECDLD) is available. 5.3.2 Secondary Device Attributes The secondary device attribute response provides the printer model ID and firmware revision level. For all printer IDs (LA50. LA210. and Level 2). the printer sends the same secondary DA reply. DA request from computer CSI > 0 ¢ 9/11 3/14 3/0 6/3 DA reply from printer or CSI > c 9/11 3/14 6/3 ESC | > 1 6 ; Ps2 ¢ 1/11 5/11 3/14 3/1 3/6 3/11 *** g/3 First parameter (1 6) identifies the printer as the LA75. Second parameter (Ps2) identifies the firmware revision level. Currently Ps2 =1 (3/1). 108 STATUS, REPORT AND RESET SEQUENCES the 5.4 DEVICE STATUS REQUEST (DSF The printer sends an answer to a device status request sequence from the computer. The following sequences control the printer status reports and enable or disable unsolicited reports. Mnemonic Name Device status @ DSR Function Sequence CSI n 9/11 6/14 CSI 0 n 9/11 3/0 6/14 request or CSI 9/11 3/5 CSI 9/11 3/15 CSI 9/11 3/15 n Send extended 6/14 status report. 1 n Disable all unsolicited 3/1 6/14 status reports. 2 n Enable unsolicited brief 3/2 6/14 status report and send extended status report. CSI ? 3 n Enable unsolicited 9/11 3/15 3/3 6/14 extended status reports and send extended status report. 'REPORT AND RESET SEQUENCES 109 reprtabla smms m:mdxtmn such as a fmluw amd subsmuent prmter S |esat) - Unsolicited status reports are initially disabled. =~ When solicited, DSR must be processed on its way mw | the input buffer. Therefore, the printer immediately responds to DSR. even when the buffer is full and an XOFF has been sent to the host computer. The printer may receive and answer an unlimited number of status requests. The control sequences and contents of the brief and extended printer status reports are as follows. Name Mnemanic Sequence Brief Report N Device DSR status report (brief) - | | | 0 n N - 3/0 6/14 RIEL T ESC | 3 n , 1/11 3/3 6/14 / 5/11 5/11 o Device DSR | No malfunction ; detected. Malfunction | Extended Report status Function - ESC [ 11 || | detected. ‘ ESC | 0 n No malfunction 1/11 3/0 6/14 detected. 5/11 report (extended) followed by: ESC | ? 2 0 n 1/11 5/11 3/15 3/2 3/0 6/14 ESC | 3 n Malfunction 1/11 5/11 3/3 6/14 detected. followed by: ESC | ? Pn ; w. Pn 1/11 5/11 3/15 *** 3/11 ... *%¥* g/14 n . Where “Pn” be any valid combination of is an error code that can the fol values. | Pn i | "ailure 213/23/1) o i rdware fallure. * Communication failure.} ~ 122(3/2 3/2) 23 (3/2 3/3) 24 (3/2 3/4) | - Input buffer overflow.=+ - Printer deselected. Access cover open. 26 (3/2 3/6) 27 (3/2 3/7) 30(3/33/00 ey | L 32 (3/3 3/2) | ~ , Automatic sheet feec xmmlled amfl mperates ure ’cause’d by | paper feed error. * The only m_rt&ble hardware failure is a printhead mmtmm fmlure This occurs when the printhead loses track of position and attempts to move be yond the physical left stop. ) + - A communication failure can be a parity or framing error. or an erroneous character remewed by the prmter = Failures demgnated as events (mmmumcatmnfm&_ & and | g;;i&r amrflw) are automatically reset when an extended mmrt msmt and are cmly reDOrtfed whenthey occur—not whm th@y am mmt 5.6 RESET TO INITIAL STATE (RIS) This sequence resets all DEC-compatible features to the initial state without running the power-up self-test. Data in the buffer is preserved (including the DECDLD buffer) and the paper advances to the next top-of-form. Name Mnemonic Sequence Function Reset to RIS ESC c Reset printer to its 1/11 6/3 initial DEC-compatible initial state | state. NOTE: RIS does not reset IBM-compatible settings. 5.7 SOFT TERMINAL RESET (DECSTR) This sequence resets all features to DEC-compatible initial state (as with RIS) without running the power-up self-test. Data in the buffer is preserved and the paper advances to the next top-of-form. Name Mnemonic Soft DECSTR terminal @ Sequence Function CSI ! p 9/11 2/1 7/0 reset ~ Reset printer to its DEC-compatible initial state. NOTE: DECSTR does not reset IBM-compatible settings. 5.8 LOADING FACTORY NONVOLATILE MEMORY (NVH) SETTINGS (DECFNVR) The DECFNVR sequence allows you to enter and store in the printer’'s memory the set-up menu parameters. You cannot load the power-up or currently active parameters. The DECFNRV-selected parameters will become active the next time the printer is powered up. WARNING: Use of this sequence in the LA75 is limited to 10.000 writes. If you use this function in your application software. care must be taken NOT to iuse this sequence more than 10.000 times during the expected lifetime of the printer. 112 STATUS, REPORT AND RESET SEQUENCES Name Mnemonic Sequence Loading DECFNVR CSI Psl ; Ps2 ... Psn'! u 9/11 *%* 3/11 **+* ¥*% 211 17/5 Factory NVR Settings Psl = Set-up feature 1 Ps2 = Set-up feature 2 Psn = Set-up feature n The DECFNVR parameters must match the select features and values defined in the set-up menu (Section 2.8). Example: The following sequence sets the Print Quality (DEC) feature to LQ printing and stores it for later use on the next power up. CSI;::;::2'u STATUS, REPORT AND RESET SEQUENCES 113 i L i L A G GRAPHIC MODE U This chapter describes how to send graphm data to the LA75 printer set in the DEC~compamble mode. 6.1 OVERVIEW To print graphics, you must use sixe/ data. A sixel is a column of six vertical pixels. Pixels are the smallest elements of a picture — the individual dots on a video terminal screen or a dot matrix printer. A. sixel represems bit map data. Each pixel of a sixel represents one bit of information. A bit value of 1 means to print a pixel, while a bit value of 0 means to leave a space. The printer decodes the sixel data into bits of information and maps them to the 9 printhead impact elements for printing (Figure sloo e elee®oo0o0o0|N 0w O @® OO0 0O O0O|® O b3 w000 O0O|® 000 @ 0Ofd 3loooole oo e o0 oo 2looooleoeooolo b1 b2 O 0OO0OO|®O® OO0 0N b0 s— b5 w—— b3 o b2 é’ b0 b1 olooe ele @000 0|= 6-1). UPPER LOWER CflL?MNS MA-0651-83 Figure 6-1 Sixel Pattern 115 Sixel data consists of characters each represented by a binary bit pattern. To encodepicture data into valid sixel data, first convert each six-bit binary sixel to a hemdemmal value. In each sixel column, the least significant bit corresponds to the mp pixel, and the most significant bit corresponds to the bottom pixel. Because smel column codes are restricted to charactersin the range from ? (3/15) through~ (7/14), you must then add the hexadecimal offset 3/15 (decimal 63) to each sixel column value. For example, the binary value of 000000 is verted to hexadecimal 3/15, binary 110101 is converted to hexadecimal 7/4 plus 3/15). and binary 111111 is converted to hexdecimal 7/14 (3/15 plus After this binary-to-hexdecimal conversion. you can convert the hexadecimal values for each sixel into the equivalent characters using the ASCII table (Figure 3-1). 6.2 SELECTING GRAPHIC MODE: THE SIXEL PROTOCOL You select Graphic mode by sending a special device control smng (DCS). You S include all yaursixel graphic data and formatting mfmmatmnin the device con| . ; | | trol string. The formatting fimtm of the device control string is called the sixel protocol selector. The rest of this section descmbes the features you can select within the sixel protocc;l selector. The device c:mtml strmg starts with the DCS D control code, called a string in- troducer. Next comes the protocol selector, ‘which mntmm your formattinginformation. The protocol selectoris followed by the sixel graphic data. Finally. the string terminator (ST) control code ends the fitrmg The ST code also ends Graphic mode. oy Device Control String (DCS) Format DCS Psl | | | 9/0 String *#* /11 Ps2 *R* | Introducer 116 ; | ; Z[11 Ps3 .. Ps? q k% sk Protocol Selector - GRAPHIC MODE {0 or more characters) /] | 3 , sixeldata ST k*xkx Picture Data -k f 912 l { String Terminator A e 6.2.1 String Introducer When you send the string introducer in Text mode. you identify the start of the device control string. In the LA75, sixel graphic mode is one of the three valid uses of the device control strings. You can use the 8-bit DCS (9/0) control code or the 7-bit ESC P (1/11 5/0) escape sequence for the string introducer. 6.2.2 Protocol Selector The protocol selector can contain a string of 0, 1, or more selective parameters (Ps), each separated by a ; (3/11). A valid selective parameter can have 0. 1. or more digits in the column/row range of 3/0 to 3/9. When you send any selective parameter with the final character q (7/1). the printer enters the Graphic mode. The protocol selector has the following format. Psl ; Ps2 ; Ps3 ¥kk 3/11 k*k* 3[/11 R¥x .. Ps gq k%% 7] 6.2.2.1 Macro Parameter (Ps1) - The Psl parameter selects the fixed horizontal grid size (pixel width) and aspect ratio. This parameter provides for backward compatibility with existing software. NOTE: For new software, you should set Psl to 0, explicitly define the hori- zontal grid size (by using Ps3), and the aspect ratio numerator and denominator (by using Pnl and Pn2 of the "Set Raster Attributes” control sequence (Paragraph 6.3.2.2). Horizontal Pixel Aspect Ratio Image Grid Size (Inches) (Vertical:Horizontal) Scale Size 0 or none 1/144 (0.0069) 200:100 (2:1) Full Scale 1 1/144 (0.0069) 200:100 (2:1) Full Scale 4 1/180 (0.0056) 250:100 (2.5:1) Full Scale 9 1/72 (0.0139) 100:100 (1:1) Full Scale Psl NOTE: The ; (3/11) marks the end of the current parameter. 6.2.2.2 Background Select (Ps2) - This parameter is not used on the LA75. The printer ignores this parameter. | 6.2.2.3 Horizontal Grid Size (Ps3) - The Ps3 parameter defines the horizontal grid size (pixel width) in decipoints. A decipoint is 1/720 inch. This parameter and the aspect ratio define the grid size and image scale size. The printer has horizontal grid size defaults for some decipoint values. The following shows the horizontal grid size specified for each Ps3 value. Ps3 Decipoints Horizontal Grid Size (1/720 Inch Units) (Inches) 0 or none No change to grid size (defined by Ps1) 1, 2, and 3* 1/180 (0.0056) 4 1/180 (0.0056) 6} 1/144 6* 1/144 (0.0069) (0.0069) 7% 1/144 (0.0069) 8 1/90 (0.0111) Q* 1/90 (0.0111) 10 1/72 (0.0139) (0.0139) 11 to 19%* 1/72 20 1/36 (0.0278) 21 and up* 1/36 (0.0278) * Defaults to horizontal grid size listed. [f Ps3 is 0 or not present, the horizontal grid size is determined by the macro parameter (Psl). Otherwise, Ps3 overrides the horizontal grid size portion of the Psl, while attempting to preserve the aspect ratio (A/R) as follows. When Ps1 selects a 2.5:1 aspect ratio 118 Resulting Image Ps3 Resulting Aspect Ratio (A/R) Selection And Horizontal Grid Size (HGS) Scale Size 1/180 in. 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/180 in. Full Scale 1/144 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/180 Full Scale 1/90 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/90 2 x Full Scale 1/72 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/90 2 x Full Scale 1/36 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/90 2 x Full Scale GRAPHIC MODE ¢ When Psl selects a 2:1 aspect ratio Ps3 Selection @~ 1/180 in. ¢ Resulting Image And Horizontal Grid Size (HGS) Scale Size 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/180 in. Full Scale 2:1 A/R and HGS of 1/144 Full Scale 1/144 1/90 ~ 2:1 A/IRand HGS of 1/144 Full Scale 1/72 1/36 ~ ~ 2:1 A/R and HGS of 1/72 2:1 A/R and HGS of 1/72 2 x Full Scale 2 x Full Scale , When Psl selects a 1:1 aspect ratio Ps3 Selection —_ - Resulting Aspect Ratio (A/R) Resulting Aspect Ratio (A/R) And Horizontal Grid Size (HGS) Resulting Image 1/180 in. 2.5:1 A/R and HGS 0.5 x Full Scale 1/144 1/90 1:1 A/R and HGS of 1/144 1:1 A/R and HGS of 1/144 0.5 x Full Scale 0.5 x Full Scale 1:1 A/R and HGS of 1/72 1:1 A/R and HGS of 1/36 Full Scale 2 x Full Scale 1/72 1/36 = -~ of 1/180 in. Scale Size 6.2.2.4 Additiaba’l Parafmmem (Ps?) - Additional parameters may be supported in future products. The LA75 ignores other parameters without affecting the cyrrent sixel protocol sequence. 6.2.2.5 Final CMracmfir (@) - The final character q (7/1) identifies this sequence as a sixel protocol selector and places the printer in Graphic mode. 6.2.3 Picture Data - Picture data inéludes sixel printable characters and sixel control characters. The printer processes picture data in Graphic mode as defined in Section 6.3. In Graphic mode. printing is performed only unidirectionally. 6.2.4 String Terminator (ST) , The string terminator (ST) control code causes the printer to leave Graphic - mode and enter Text mode. You can use the 8-bit control code ST (9/12) or the - 7-bit escape sequence ESC \ (1/11. 5/12) for the string terminator. 6.3 CHARACTER PROCESSING INGRAPHIC MODE I&n Gm: 1ic mod ,Wmmbl@ cham{:%‘e r-‘*m'% dfi‘ finespe ‘»f';fim c slumns of dots to 6.3.1 Sixel prmtabw Characters In sixel gra‘»w z@ the prmmr mmm rets GL (graphic left) characters in the 1itable ¢ ffmmu? ers. Each of these 64 epresents a code mf 6 vertwal pmam (1 sixel) to print. The actual pixel size is defmed by the horizontal grid size (HGS) parameter and the aspect ratio (Pamgraph 6.2.2) | TR The prmter 3;,maw a hexadecim m wfimt mf 3!15 fmmem},{. graphic printable character received, resultingin a bmmy valuein the rrange of 0/0 to 3/15. The 6-bit bmmy value abtamed represents a sxml mmmrx d@*,mmfln For each.bxt set to 1, the printer activates apmm !:}%dmemt or groupof elements to print a dot. The least sign ificant. bitm mis tlm top pixel of a j sixel. The prmter processes GR (graphm mghmcharacters inthe 11/15 to 15/14 range as GLcharacters. by settingthe eighth bi d subt ,ctmg the 3/15 hma~ decimal offset fmm the gmphm pxmtabla chamamr Column/ Row ASCIH Chmmwr 315 4/0 5/15 ? @ 714 A L Binary Pixels Value ,"Actwated 000000 000001 100000 111111 None Top Bottom All ~ Action Performed Admnce by a mml space. Print toppixel only. Print bottom pixel only. i»"rmt (:ma full cmlumn If you try to print pmt‘ the right margin, the printer truncates all remaining sixel data until it receives the next graphic carriage mmm {$) or gmphm new - line (-} character. | Sl Slml wmmlCO :w are GL chamaters in the 2/0 m 3/14 mni'; Num that this range also mcludw the parametersef “mtm{3!1 U and mmmeter dxgmts 0to9 (3/0 to 3/9). | Theprinter prwcesses GR ehamci,;jf:"m , mthe 10/0 to 11/ 14 range as GL characters, by setting the eighth bit to 0. | | _;aws the fmmwmg mml mmml chmmmm The printer f’m Column/ Row - 2/1 ASCII Character Function ! ‘Repeat introducer 2/2 ” 2/4 $ Graphic carriage return — Graphic new line Numeric parameters ~ Parameter separator 2/13 3/0 to 3/9 Set raster attributes ~0to9 3/11 A A control sequence in Gmphm moda begins with a sixel mmml character (not including the 0 to 9 and : ch acmm) and @m:is thh eitl m"a pmntabie character or anot. ner mmlwm;ml chamcter | | The printer ignores unassxgn@d mml control charachem (along with any param eters or ‘parameter separators) u:m:al receiving the next valid sixel control t:har~ cter, pmntabm chamnter, or stm‘& termmamr (S“T} 6.3.2.1 Repeat ‘n‘tmducm (!) and Sequence - You can use the following sequence to print the same character a consecutive number of times. ! Pn 92]1 kx# printable character , , , Pn specifies the number of times to print the character that follows. The numeric parameter is a string of characters in the 3/0 to 3/9 range that the printer interprets as a decimal number, from 0 to 65,535. If you omit Pn or set Pn to 0, the printer uses 1. If you use a Pn value larger than 65535, the printer uses the maximum value of 65535. NOTE: Sixel control characters received during a repeat sequence cancel the repeat sequence. The printer will then process these control characters, The LAT7S5 prints the printable character (in the 3/15 to 7/14 range) as many times as specified by Pn. The printable character terminates the repeat sequence. Examples Repeat Sequence Function ! 1 0 ? 2/1 3/1 3/0 3/15 ! 6 @ 2/1 36 4/0 Repeats 10 graphic spaces. , Repeats 6 patterns of top dot. 6.3.2.2 Set Raster Attributes Sequence - This sequence defines the pixel as- pect ratio. This aspect ratio applies to all sixel data that follow. After entering Graphic mode, the printer must immediately receive this sequence before the first sixel printable character. It the printer receives the sequence after any other valid sixel data, the printer recognizes this sequence but ignores its parameters. The printer continues to process all following sixel data. It the sequence is received before any other valid sixel data, the printer processes the sequence. The set raster attributes sequence format is as follows. " Pnl ; Pn2 2/2 k%% 3[1] **¥%x 3/1] Pn3 ; k¥kx /1] where 4 = Set raster attributes control character. Pnl = Pixel aspect ratio numerator. and Pn2 = Pixel aspect ratio denominator. 122 GRAPHIC MODE Pn4 kk* — Pnl and Pn2 are numeric parameters. A numeric parameter is a string of characters in the 3/0 to 3/9 range, which the printer evaluates as decimal - numbers. If the parameter is a value larger than the maximum 65.535. the printer uses 65.535. If Pnl and Pn2 are 0, the printer uses an aspect ratio of 2.5:1. Pn3, Pn4 and all other pammmew received in this sequence are ignored by the prmter o= Pixel aspect ratio defines the shape of the pixel needed to reproduce the picture without distortion. This ratio is defined by two numbers. a numerator and a denominator. The pixel aspect ratio 13 t:he mtm of the pixel’s vertical size to its horizontal size. For example. an aspect ratio of 2:1 represents a pixel twice as high as it is wide. The pixel aspect ratio (A/R) multiplied by the horizontal grid size (HGS) yields the ideal vertical grid size (VGS). This printer supports only the following three aspect ratios. Aspect S.ixal HGS Horizontal Ratio Scale (inch) Dots/Pixel 1:1 0.5 1/144 1/144 Full 1/72 1/72 2 X 1/36 1/36 VGS (inch) 1/144 2:1 2 x 2.5:1 - Full 2% 1/72 1/36 1/180 1/72 1/90 1/36 Other aspect ra;im specified by Pnl and Pn2 are processed as follows. ° If the aspect ratio is less than 1.5:1, the printer uses 1:1. o If the aspect ratio is greater than or equal to 1.5:1 and less than 2.25:1, the printer uses 2:1. . If the aspect ratio is greater than 2.25:1. the printer uses 2.5:1. - The printer attempts to preserve the specified aspect ratios at each horizontal grid size as follows: When the selected aspect ratio is 2.5:1 Horizontal Resulting Aspect Ratio (A/R) Grid Size Resulting Image And Horizontal Grid Size (HGS) Scale Size Full Scale 1/180 in. 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/180 in. 1/144 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/180 Full Scale 1/90 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/90 2 x Full Scale 1/72 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/90 1/36 2 x Full Scale 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/90 2 x Full Scale When the selected aspect ratio is 2:1 Horizontal Resulting Aspect Ratio (A/R) Grid Size Resulting Image And Horizontal Grid Size (HGS) Scale Size 1/180 in. 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/180 in. Full Scale 1/144 2:1 A/R and HGS of 1/144 Full Scale 1/90 2:1 A/R and HGS of 1/144 Full Scale 1/72 2:1 A/R and HGS of 1/72 2 x Full Scale 1/36 2:1 A/R and HGS of 1/72 2 x Full Scale When the selected aspect ratio is 1:1 124 Horizontal Resulting Aspect Ratio (A/R) Resulting Image Grid Size And Horizontal Grid Size (HGS) Scale Size 0.5 x Full Scale 1/180 in. 2.5:1 A/R and HGS of 1/180 in. 1/144 1:1 A/R and HGS of 1/144 0.5 x Full Scale 1/90 1:1 A/R and HGS of 1/144 0.5 x Full Scale 1/72 1:1 A/R and HGS of 1/72 Full Scale 1/36 1:1 A/R and HGS of 1/36 2 x Full Scale GRAPHIC MODE By following these rules, the only possible vertical grid sizes the printer can use are 1/144, 1/72 or 1/36 inch. This means the printer can only support three vertical pixel scaies Each vertical mxel size mrresponds to a vertical sixel size (six vertical pixels) and image scale size as described below and in Appendix B. Image Vertical Vertical Sixel Size Scale Size 1/144 inch 1/24 inch 0.5 Scale Grid Size | o Pixel Construction 1/2 vertical dot per pixel (twopass printing, pixel overlap) 1/72inch 1/12 inch ‘Full Scale 1 vertical dot per pixel 1/36 inch 1/6 inch 2 x Scale 2 vertical dots per pixel 6.3.2.3 Graphic Carriage Return ($) - The graphic carriage return (GCR) control md@ $ (2/4) returns the carriage to the graphic left margin. The graphic left margin is the active position where the printer enters the Graphic mode. This allows overprinting lines of sixel data. 6.3.2.4 Graphic New Line (-) - The gra‘phid new line QGN’L) control code (2/13) ends a printed graphic sixel line by . retuming the printhead to the graphic left 'margin.. and . advancing the paper to print the next sixel line. The active vertical position is advanced by one sixel line at the current vertical grid size. | 6.3.2.5 Numeric Parameters (0—9) - Some graphic control codes must be followed by a numeric value. The numeric value is a dm:imm number, coded by using the ASCII digits 0 to 9 (3/0 to 3/9). A numeric value is ended by any nondigit. specifically another control code or a gmphm printable character. The default value for any numeric parameter is 0. 6.3.2.6 Parameter Separator (;) - The parameter separator: (3/11) separates a series of numeric parameters. If there is no number before the separator. then the preceding parameter value defaults to 0. If a number does not follow the separator, then the following parameter value defaults to 0. GRAPHIC MODE 125 6.3.3 Graphic C0 Control Characters In Graphic mode, the printer ignores all CO control characters except CAN', SUB, and ESC. When these control characters are received. the printer per- forms the following actions. C0 Control Character CAN | Printer Action Leaves Graphic mode, enters Text mode, then processes CAN. SUB Processes SUB as a sixel space (3/15) to limit communication line errors (Paragraph 6.3.4). ESC Leaves Graphic mode. enters Text mode, then processes ESC. NOTE: When the printer receives any C1 control code in Graphic mode, the printer leaves Graphic mode and enters Text mode. The printer then processes the C1 control codes, if recognized. 6.3.4 Graphic Substitute (SUB) Character The printer interprets the substitute character SUB (1/10) as being in place of a character or characters received in error. In Graphic mode, the printer processes SUB as a sixel space character (3/15). e If the printer is processing a repeat sequence, the sequence is terminated. The printer then prints a number of sixel spaces equal to the repeat number specified in the repeat sequence. The printer remains in Graphic mode. 6.3.5 Leaving Graphic Mode The following control characters cause the printer to leave Graphic mode and perform the following actions. Control Character CAN Printer Action | | Enters Text mode and processes the CAN character. ESC Enters Text mode and begins processing another escape sequence. ST 126 Enters Text mode. GRAPHIC MODE . 6.3.6 Printer State After Leaving Graphic Mode After leaving Graphic mode, the printer enters the foll()wing state. @ Horizontal position returns to the last active position before entering Graphic mode. Horizontal pitch returns to the last value used before entering Graphic mode. Vertical position is modified by the vertical control characters re- ceived in Graphic mode. Vertical pitch returns to the last value used before entering Graphic mode. | | All SGR attributes return to the last state before entering Graphic mode. GRAPHIC MODE 127 i i g, g st PART E D O M N O I T A L EMU CHAPTER 7 IBM EMULATION FEATURES . . . . . C CHAPTER 8 ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION nn nn nn a a a a g sl A R A L This chapter describes the LA75 basic features, control characters and character sets used in the IBM Proprinter emulation mode. 7.1 GENERAL You can manually s.mt the LA75 tfl operate in the IBM emulatmn mode using the front panel PROTOCOL switch and/or the set-up menu (described in Section 2.8). The OTHER indicator on the frontpanel lights up if the printer is i in the IBM emulation mode. You can also en’mr and exit IBM operating mode under software control using the DECIPEM sequences (see Paragraph 8.2.5)’. Feature settings for IBM emulation mode. as they am prefiemwd in the menu 14 Active Character Set Auto Carmaga Return on LF BD On | Set A Set B On Off FS FS Off = 18 Auto Line Feed on CR Zero without slash BN 17 FS , = 16 | Slashed Zero B 15 Paper Out Bell [N selection. are as follows (F'S is factory setting). B - FS | FS 131 19 Power-up Print Density | 20 LQor NLQ 1 Draft 2 NLQ/LQ 1 NLQ 2 LQ F'S F'S The LA75 is completely compatible with existing software packages written for the IBM Proprinter. While in the emulation mode, the LA75 uses the IBMcompatible escape and control sequences that allow the software developed for the IBM Proprinter to run without modifications. In IBM emulation mode. the LA75 can runeither as a text printer or a graphics printer. The following paragraphs describe these modes and character pro- cessing features. 7.1.1 Line-Oriented Buffer and Line Terminators In DEC mode, the LA75 operates as a character printer: characters cannot be altered after they are sent to the printer. In IBM emulation mode. the printer operates as a buffered lineprinter; received characters are stored in a buffer until the printer receives a line terminator character. Then. the entire contents of the buffer are printed. You can erase an entire line while it is still in the buffer. The following characters and escape sequences are line termmators and cause the contents of the buffer to print. BS Backspace CR Carriage return LF Line feed VT Vertical tab FF Form feed ESCJ Set variable line feed ESCL Enter graphic mode ESCK Enter graphic mode ESCY Enter graphic mode ESC Z Enter graphic mode [f no line terminator is recewed the buffer will empty 0.5 seconds after the receipt of the last character. 132 IBM EMULATION FEATURES Mode Overview The graphic eficape sequences operate differently than the line buffer operation described above. Graphic escape sequences are self-terminating. Each sequence - specifies the number of graphic data bytes to follow. When the printer receives the specified number of data bytes. the printer prints the graphic data, unless a timeout in data transmission has occurred. In this mode. the buffer will auto- matically empty 3 seconds after the receipt of last character. 7.1.3 Compatible Control Characters, Escape Sequences, and Character Sets In emulation mode, all escape sequences and control characters are compatible with software written for the IBM Proprinter. The character sets used by the LA75 in the @mulatmn moda are compatible with character sets used by the emulated IBM Proprinter. The LA75 also provides line drawing mmpambxlnty with IBM screen charactem 7.1.4 Charamer Size In emulatmn mode. the LA75 usually prints 1/8»mch high characters, although some graphic characters are 1/6-inch high and are IB M«-cmmpatmblte Most of the characters in IBM emulation mode are printed in a 9 x 9 dot matrix (draft -font). When you select high resolution printing, the printer can use either NearLetter Quality (17 x 17) or Letter Quahty(27 x 18) dot matrix in the same size character cell. rd, Compressed, and Double-\ Vidth Printing IBM emulation mode uses control characters to select standard or compressed printing. Compressed printing provides more characters per inch. Control characters and escape sequences are also used for selecting double-width or singlewidth printing. When the printer receives a control character or escape sequence that indicates double-width printing, the printer doubles the character size of the eurrent standard or compressed prmtmg Thm allows six combinations of character size (Table 7-1). IBM EMULATION FEATURES 133 Table 7-1 Character Sizes Vs. Print Density Character Width Selection Standard Compressed Singlé width 10 cpi 12 cpi 17.1 cpi Double width 5 Ccpi 6 cpi 8.55 cpi 7.1.6 Escape Sequence Processing Some escape sequences require parameters. These parameters are represented by Ps or Pn. The characters *** below Ps or Pn represent the encoding of the parameter. Both the processing of escape sequences and coding of parameters differ between DEC mode and IBM emulation mode. To send a decimal parameter “X” in the IBM emulation mode, send the character with the decimal value equal to X. For example, to send a parameter of 115 decimal. send the character “s” which is located in 7/3 and has the decimal code of 115. 7.2 CHARACTER SETS This section describes the character sets the LA75 printer uses while emulating an IBM Proprinter. This mode causes the printer to respond to the same con- trol characters and escape sequences used by the IBM Proprinter, and to print the same characters. As with the IBM Proprinter, three character sets are available — character sets A, B. and All Characters. These character sets are software selectable. | The character sets are selected using corresponding escape sequences described in Chapter 8. | | 7.2.1 Character Set Charts Figures 7-1 through 7-3 show character sets A, B, and All Characters. respectively. 134 IBM EMULATION FEATURES | _ fla_ ifl’w“‘i"' L RO e - COLUMN 117 118 | el t ASCI! CHARACTER B4A MA - 0805 M Graphic Character Set A (GL) (Sheet 1 of 2) 135 1 0 0 1 0 9 8 NUL 1 1 9 128 a %0 202 2422 82 92 203 223 130 |DC2 | 6| 83 | 93 204 224 132 DC4 148 e 94 205 85 206 86 | 230 87 97 BS | 1| CAN |, 88 98 211 231 HT | 1, s3] 89 99 212 138 232 213 - 233 ESC 155 214 234 : FO X _2, 344 228 O : /.1 2 é | T ¥ 242 363 |2 F3 r j a 241 362 F2 € E3 , 240 364 244 Fa 365 245 FS5 366 246 F6 367 T 247 , 370 F7 é 248 F8 ‘ n 8 249 Fg O 72 250 , FA 6, : 373 16 | Va (0 0] 252 141 235 i g 253 216 236 158 | "¢¢ 6 254 N 255 % 8C 8C 215 1 2] Z ! VA 88 FF | s SO : ~ 343 I n 9A 139 a:m E2 @ 154 8A : I | 2 - 227 25| P 150 210 CR & N BEL | 5 vT fi 96 207 274 342 149 95 226 134 p i 25 | - _ 133 LF a 1 15 E0 129 | DCY | 148 13 | DC3 p 14 144 80 | 1 1 . 157 80 90 142 8E 9€E 217 Sl | e 8F 237 : 159 9k 5 ADDITIONAL CONTROL SET g 251 Fe ' 374 FC 375 FD 376 FE 377 I FF , A | SUPPLEMENTAL CHARACTER SET 1 MA . OB06 - Bdo, iy Figure 7-1 IBM Graphic Character Set A (GR) (Sheet 2 of 2) 136 IBM EMULATION FEATURES e e Ch §§§?§R ks LR exdira3]|ee HT ASCII CHARACTER | MA -0B07 -B48 Figure 7-2 I BM Graphic Character Set B (GL) (Sheet 1 of 2) A 1 0 : 0 1 1 ) 0 8 G | o 220 144 % § 120 & | 48 LI %?% o e | fi - | 241 At G # v~ 83 93 a 132 reY o1 224 148 B4 < - lw| O 1 R C - 134 U 86 207 87 T 22 . w 213 O , £ [ 216 , 217 ]| A | w2 R 8E | 81 L1 262 302 178 |1ws] 4 | 321 o1 322 194 210 F | [T C2 263e | feI . | 303 “‘ -y 323 195 | B2 83 , c3 34 n some | 106 03 h ¥, } - N . a 1 : || 2 w2 98 & 8F | 342 F1 k2 2.. 242 |27] € |20 344 , 343 E3] 228 E4 €6 U7 r || Q 232 8 r ‘ J €70 351 Fq 365 245 367 |2 F? 248 F8 EA 53 364 244 F6 = - 234 an DO F9 372 250 Fa 73 o) zécz J 2:% 234 |ss] 9c % 354 00 | 28] EC TM 374 |2 FC | | |w] 9€ 237 || L | B el 253 ED (¢ » € | e 257 27| 337 AF -l 8F DF | 191 23] | () EE] BT | 20| _EF A 375 TM 356 SR F5 382 fl F3 366 I E9 363F2 2= | 246 O | s ' 241 362| 226 E5 . 361 A 158 | o X Er u;;z o £ »s| 341 346 _%0 pt 15 M | 0] |wa|® |23 ¥ z 2| 233 1 360 = | 200 FO_ O | e 306 i 340 |24] EO 345 F | 2 O 209 l fi 154 | "% 80 % | 226 301 177 -L- 193 1 14 320§ 08f) 00 gA ~ | 214 I |w| 8C | 215 A3 261 [ ' 0 13 n [232 BA ¢ I LY 243 | 1 1 1 | L;m | 192 €0 1 0 99 .. 138 1:; - (]| 97 e 1w s 225 | 227 U 89 e | % ~ || e | 13 88 s |2 260 176 80 95 E T 242 | 1 0 12 s 94 | 206 @ ETY & w@ 203 ~ 223|w|a2 ] O 204 |24 160 A0 N |ws| 1 1 1 11 221 222 | & 1 0 10 E LR 1 ' 0 200 |=» L 201 ' o 1 O . 254 e | 37 SP A k¥] FE S |25 FF I Ma -0608-845 Figure 7-2 IBM Graphic Character Set B (GR) (Sheet 2 of 2) 138 IBM EMULATION FEATURES ASCIi CHARACTER | Figure 7-3 IBM All Character Set (GL) (Sheet 1 of 2) I S ' 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 9 Jo G L ] o T || 8o E 701 10 [0 |1 90 221 . %2 & 130 V| 91 27 , _ 83 | 204 @ gfi 1| o 84 s @ a , |05 o lwaa|] O 206 134 || € 12101 || € - | 89 212 e 138 | 213 el _ | o8 . I I 214 [wo]| 150 | 227 Y e O P £ j ¥ 8D 142 pt 8E —~ A | 217 | oF B2 263 179 ‘ 192 co 301 < ' O 200 fi 322 194 a0 c2 ' 32 303 | H 133 195 am| €3 304 5 | h = s3] 9 98 234 |ss] oc 235 |w] %0 T ® e fl ' vy O Y% - __DD 336 2) oF DE B! | 337 23 DF 31 |2 F1 232 351 [7, k2 < r 244 J 245 £3 364 365 F5 == | 26 LA 367 < |2 o | 370 F7 248 | an o F9 Eal 353 | =] €8 TM T _EF| 251 F8 374 |2 FC | 253 o 29| 373 RES B EE] I 312 250 FA J B | 356 e £8 as2 234 S 366 LI £9 i Fa | € | 23 n |22 363 |23 €8 EC i M ‘0| 00 | 26] s8] 159 || 54 236 237 347 £7 Q 9E f Ea 2 E6 154 | =9 s | |2 M | 230] 232 233 E3 344 346 & 98 E2 343 |222] ES | |2l X EVp O | 2 2 |23 ns| |26 J] , || |23 T 306 a— 3%60 = | 200 FO REIYE: > F ‘ |224] €0 347 ] 1 15 340 345 ‘ a 96 o8] Do D1 302 A 'y 14 320 321 —L 193 "262 178 | II 9A , @ 8C ee | 216 81 3 300 97 .. [w| 1215 261 N 95 |« 8A os 1 n || 226 U 88 200 243 |e i L ! o @ U 87 ~ 24 4] o~ 56 C Bt 0 % 8 207 Al A2 @ 176 1 80 e BT O | 162 a2 %27 2& |23 _ [223| 1w 0 || es |2 [ 1 ! 1 260 160 AQ [ we| 1 L 11 5 | 2o} 120 ] & | 145 81 0 ', _FD O 376 254 FE 377 SP | 25 FF RO MA-0608- 840 Figure 7-3 IBM All Character Set (GR) (Sheet 2 of 2) s 140 IBM EMULATION FEATURES fr 7.2.2 Control Characters Character sets A and B use control characters. The All Characters Set does not have control characters. Control characters are grouped into C0 and C1 sets that are used as follows: Control Character Set CO | | A Character set All Character B Used Used Not Used Used Not Used Not Used (0/0 to 1/15) C1 (8/0 to 9/15) Characters in the CO and C1 control sets usually cause the LA75 to perform an action. Control characters do not print. When it receives a control character. the printer responds by performing the action associated with that control character. | Table 7-2 is a summary of all CO and C1 control characters used by the printer in the IBM emulation mode. | Table 7-2 Summary of Control Characters Name Mnemonic Location Function in Text Mode Null NUL 0/0 (CO) 8/0 (C1) Used with ESC B and ESC D as a list terminator and with other escape sequences to select options. This code is otherwise ignored. Bell Backspace BEL BS 0/7 (CO) Causes the bell to sound for 8/7(C1) one second. 0/8 (CO) 8/8 (C1) Moves the printhead one character to the left at the current pitch. Horizontal Tab HT | 0/9 (CO) 8/9 (C1) Moves to next horizontal tab stop. At power up. tabs are set at every 8 columns. beginning at column 9 and ending at column 73. HT advances one column after the last tab is reached. Table 7-2 Summary of Control Characters (Cont) Name Mnemonic Line Feed LF Location Function in Text Mode 0/10 (CO) Advances the paper one line. 8/10 (C1) This control code cancels double-wideth printing if enabled by SO. A carriage return will occur if Auto CR is selected (#18) in the menu. Vertical VT Tab 6/11 (CO) Advances paper to the next 8/11 (C1) vertical tab stop. If none are set, acts as a line feed. Additionally, if the next VT exceeds the form length minus the bottom margin, a line feed is executed. VT cancels double- width printing if enabled by SO. A carriage return will occur if selected (#18) in the menu. Form Feed FF 0/12 (CO) Performs a carriage return 8/12 (C1) and advances to the next top of form. FF cancels double-width printing if enabled by SO. Form length is set through menu setting #4. Carriage Return CR 0/13 (CO) 8/13 (C1) Terminates the line and returns active position to column 1. No line feed occurs unless auto line feed is enabled (menu selection #16) or by ESC 5. CR cancels double-width printing if enabled by SO. 142 IBM EMULATION FEATURES Table 7-2 Summary of Control Characters (Cont) Name Mnemonic Location Shift Out SO 0/14 (CO) 8/14 (C1) Function in Text Mode Selects the double-width print mode. A carriage return, line feed, form feed, vertical tab. cancel. ESC W 0, or DC4 cancels this print mode. If at 10 cpi, SO changes the horizontal pitch to 5 cpi. If at 12 cpi, SO changes the horizontal pitch to 6 cpi. If at 17.1 cpi, SO changes the horizontal pitch to 8.55 cpi. Shift In SI 0/15 (CO) 8/15 (C1) Selects the compressed character mode. The DC2 code cancels the compressed printing mode. If at 10 cpi. SO changes the horizontal pitch to 17.1 cpi. If at 5 cpi, SO changes the horizontal pitch to 8.55 cpi. Device DC1 Control 1 Device Control 2 DC2 1/1 (CO) Selects printer to accept 9/1 (C1) data. 1/2 (CO) Terminates printing in 9/2 (C1) compressed or 12 cpi modes and sets the printer to 10 cpi (5 cpi if doublewidth). DC2 changes the horizontal pitch as follows: from 17.1 cpi to 10 cpi. from 8.55 cpi to 5 cpi. from 12 cpi to 10 cpi. and from 6 cpi to 5 cpi. Table 7-2 Summary of Control Characters (Cont) Name Mnemonic Device DC3 Control 3 Device Location Function in Text Mode 1/3 (CO) Ignored. 9/3 (C1) DC4 Control 4 1/4 (CO) Terminates printing in the 9/4 (C1) double-width mode, if set by SO, and returns to the previously selected character spacing. DC4 changes the horizontal pitch as follows: from 5 cpi to 10 cpi, from 6 cpi to 12 cpi, and from 8.55 cpi to 17.1 cpi. Cancel CAN 1/8 (CO}) Clears the last unterminated 9/8 (C1) line buffer. retaining the current print position. Printing mode status: Double-width printing is cancelled if set with SO, and remains active if set with ESC W (Section 2.4.1.1): all other printing modes remain in effect. Escape ESC 1/11(C0) 9/11(C1) Initiates all escape sequences. (See Chapter 8). 7.2.3 Special Characters The following special characters are available in all character sets. SP character (2/0) Character represented by (15/15) In Text mode. the space character (SP) increments the active column without printing. The 15/15 character performs the same function as the SP character. 144 IBM EMULATION FEATURES ESCAPE SEQUENCES 3 FOR IBM EMULATION C This chapter lists and ,describ;es the escape sequences that you can use to control LA75 operation in IBM Proprinter emulation mode. 8.1 GENERAL Escape sequences provide more control over the printer than control characters. These sequences are multiple-character strings that start with the escape character (ESC. 1/11). Escape sequences do not print. but instead control various aspects of how data prints. The following text describes IBM Proprinter Emulation mode escape sequences. These sequences are grouped by function as follows. Terminal management Vertical form handling Horizontal form handling Paper fault handling Unidirectional/bidirectional printing control Alternate character set mapping Printing modes Graphic mode NOTE: Do not use the CSI control character in the IBM Emulation mode. 8.2 TERMINAL MANAGEMENT You can control the reset (default) status and printer selection (from host computer) by using the following commands. 145 8.2.1 Reset To Initial State (RIS) ESC ¢ 1/11 6/3 This sequence resets the printer to DEC mode with DEC power-up settings. The printer advances paper to the next top of form if printing has occurred on this page. 8.2.2 Soft Terminal Reset (STR) ESC | 1/11 5/11 ' 2/1 p 7/0 This sequerice resets the printer to DEC mode with DEC power-up settings. The printer advances paper to the next top of form if printing has occurred on this page. 8.2.3 IBM Terminal Reset ESC @ /711 4/0 This sequence only resets the IBM emulation mode to its initial state without returning to DEC mode. The printer advances paper to the next top-of-form if printing has occurred on this page. 8.2.4 Deselect Printer ESC Q 3 /11 5/1 0/3 This sequence prints the contents of the print buffer. then deselects the printer. Any data following this sequence are ignored until the DC1 control character is received. 8.2.5 IBM Proprinter Emulation Mode (DECIPEM) ESC | ? 5 8 1 1/11 5/11 3/15 3/5 3/8 6/12 This sequence resets to DEC mode without resetting previous DEC protocol selections. 146 ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION 8.3 VERTICAL FORM HANDLING There are several ways to control the vertical form. You can control the size of the vertical pitch, the length of the form. the positions of the bottom margin. and vertical tabs. You can also set automatic line feed on receiving carriage return. The length of the form is the distance from the top of one page to the top of the next page. 1. Form length is usually set to the size of the paper currently in the printer. In other applications, you may want to set a smaller or lar- ger form. For example, when using the line drawing characters. you can draw multiple graphs on one page of paper. or have a graph extend over more than one page if you set to different form lengths. 2. Vertical pitch is the distance between lines and is measured in lines per inch. Vertical pitch is not the height of printed characters. When you set a new vertical pitch, all subsequent paper feed controls (like LF or VT) advance the paper at this new pitch. 3. The bottom margin is set in terms of the number of lines from the bottom of the form. You must know the current vertical pitch to do this. For example, to set a bottom margin 1 inch from the bottom of the form, using a vertical pitch of 6 lines per inch. you would set Pn equal to 6 in the set bottom margin sequence. To set the same bottom margin, using a vertical pitch of 8 lines per inch, you would set Pn equal to 8. 4. A form feed control character advances the paper to the top of the next form. The following escape sequences control the vertical forms: 8.3.1 Set Vertical Pitch (ERSLI) ESC 0 1/11 3/0 Sets vertical pitch to 8 lines per inch. ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION 147 8.3.2 Set Vertical Pitch (ER10LI) ESC 1 /11 3/1 Sets vertical pitch to 10.3 lines per inch (72/7 inch). 8.3.3 Set Vertical Pitch (ERNLI2) ESC 2 /11 3/2 Sets vertical pitch to the setting specified in a previous ESC A sequence. If none was set, sets vertical pitch to 6 lines per inch. 8.3.4 Set Vertical Pitch (ERNLI1) ESC A Pn 1/11 4/1 *** Sets vertical pitch to 72/Pn lines per inch. It does not take effect until ESC 2 is sent. If Pn = 0, it retains previous ESC A setting. Maximum Pn = 255. 8.3.5 Set Vertical Pitch (ERNLI3) ESC 3 Pn /11 3/3 *** Sets vertical pitch to 216/Pn lines per inch. Maximum Pn = 255, while Pn = 0 is ignored. 8.3.6 Set Vertical Pitch (ERNLI4) ESC J Pn /11 4/10 **%* Performs one line feed at a vertical pitch of 216/Pn lines per inch. Performs a carriage return if menu selection #18 is set. Maximum Pn = 255, while Pn = 0 is ignored. ESC J does not affect the line feed caused by LF control character. 148 ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION 8.3.7 Set Form Length (ERSFL) ESC C Pn 1/11 4/3 ¥k Sets form length (in inches) to Pn (required number of lines) times the current vertical pitch. Sets top of form, and clears bottom margin. Maximum Pn = 255, while Pn = 0 is ignored. Maximum absolute form length is 151 inches. NOTE: This sequence overrides menu selection #4 (Form Length). 8.3.8 Set Form Length (ERSFLI) ESC C NUL Pn 111 4/3 0/0 **# Sets form length to Pn inches as you requested. sets top of form, and clears bottom margin. Maximum Pn = 151, while Pn = 0 is ignored. NOTE: This sequence overrides menu selection #4 (Form Length). 8.3.9 Set Bottom Margin (ERSBM) ESC N Pn 1/11 4/14 **#* Sets bottom margin (in inches) to Pn lines from the current form length using the current vertical pitch. Maximum Pn = 255, while Pn = 0 is ignored. 8.3.10 Clear Bottom Margin (ERCBM) ESC O 1/11 4/15 Clears bottom margin. ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION 149 8.3.11 Set Vertical Tabs ESC B Pnl Pn2 Pn NUL 1/11 4/2 **% *x*x%x *x¥xx ()/( Sets vertical tab stops at Pnl, Pn2. and other designated stops. Pn is a character representing the line number of the desired tab stop. For example, character 1/2 sets a tab at line 18. You must specify tab positions in ascending order, any descending values are ignored. This sequence cancels any previously set tabs. 8.3.12 Set Top Of Form ESC 4 /11 3/4 Set the current paper position as top of form. 8.3.13 Enable/Disable Automatic Line Feed ESC 5 Ps 1/11 3/5 *** If Ps = 1 (0/1). this sequence causes a line feed to occur whenever the printer receives a carriage return (CR control code). If Ps = 0 (NUL). this sequence disables an automatic line feed on receiving a carriage return (CR control code). NOTE: This sequence overrides menu setting #16. 8.4 HORIZONTAL FORM HANDLING This section describes how to select single- or double-width printing, how to use an escape sequence to perform a carriage return, how to set horizontal tabs. and how to select 12 cpi horizontal pitch. 150 ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION o 8.4.1 Print Width and Carriage Return Double-width printing doubles the width of the current character setting. For example, if the current character pitch setting is compressed, the double-width print command doubles the width of the compressed characters. You can send an escape sequence that sets double- or single-width characters. You can send these escape sequences while printing in compressed or standard pitches. so there are six different combinations of horizontal pitch. 8.4.1.1 Set Double-Width Characters (EREDW) ESC W Ps 1/11 5/7 **#* If Ps = 1 (0/1), this sequence sets double-width characters for current and following lines. 8.4.1.2 Set Single-Width Characters (ERDDW) ESC W Ps 1/11 5/7 0/0 If Ps = 0 (NUL), this sequence sets single-width characters for current and following lines. 8.4.1.3 Carriage Return (PCR1) ESC <« /11 3/12 This sequence provides a carriage return without performing a line feed, unless the auto line feed is enabled with the menu setting #16 or the ESC 5 sequence. ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION 151 8.4.2 Horizontal Tabs Horizontal tabs are column-oriented, predefined positions on the paper. There are 137 possible HT stops on the line. When the HT control character is sent, the printhead advances to the next horizontal tab, if any are set. Horizontal tabs correspond to column locations. not physical positions. For example. if you set compressed print, the tab stops correspond to the compressed character columns. You can specify up to 28 tabs in one escape sequence. The following escape sequences modify horizontal tabs. 8.4.2.1 Set Horizontal Tabs (ERSHT) ESC D Pnl Pn2 Pn NUL 1/11 4/4 **% *%x #xx (/) Clears all horizontal tab stops and sets horizontal tab stops at Pnl, Pn2. and other designated stops. Pn is a character representing the column number of the desired tab stop. For example. character DC2 (1/2) sets a tab at column 18. Tabs must be specified in ascending order, any descending character is ignored. This sequence cancels all previously set tabs, 8.4.2.2 Set All Horizontal Tabs D ESC R 1/11 &/2 Sets horizontal tab stop every eight columns beginning with column 9. Additionally. all previously set vertical tab stops are cleared. 8.4.3 Set Horizontal Spacing to 12 CPI The following escape sequence allows you to select horizontal pitch. ESC /11 3/10 Sets the printer to 12 cpi if single width. or set to 6 cpi if double width is selected. 8.5 PAPER FAULT HANDLING The following escape sequences handle paper fault conditions. When the paper-out detector on the printer is enabled. the printer stops if it is out ot paper. 152 ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION v 8.5.1 Disable Paper Out (ERDPO) ESC /11 8 3/8 Disables paper-out handling. 8.5.2 Enable Paper Out (EREPO) ESC 9 /11 3/9 Enables paper-out handling. 8.6 UNIDIRECTIONAL/BIDIRECTIONAL PRINTING CONTROL In bidirectional printing mode, which can be used for text printing only. the printhead prints lines of text in both directions (right and left). In unidirec- tional mode, the printhead prints in the left-to-right direction only. Bidirectional printing is faster, because there is less nonprinting printhead motion. Unidirectional printing reduces possible misregistration. Unidirectional printing is also useful when printing vertical lines, because there is less chance for individual dots in the vertical line to appear out of alignment. The following sequences select printing direction. 8.6.1 Set Bidirectional Printing (ERDUD) ESC U 1/11 5/6 Ps *** If Ps = 0 (0/0). bidirectional mode (text only) is enabled. 8.6.2 Set Unidirectional Printing (EREUD) ESC U Ps 1/11 5/6 *% ¥ If Ps = 1 (0/1), unidirectional left-to-right mode is enabled. NOTE: Bit-image graphic always uses unidirectional printing. ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION 153 8.7 ALTERNATE CHARACTER SET MAPPING The following escape sequences let you select the alternate character sets. You can find these character sets in Figures 7-1 through 7-3. NOTE: The following sequences override menu setting #17. 8.7.1 Select Set A (ERCO01) ESC 7 /11 3/7 Selects character set A. 8.7.2 Select Set B (ERC02) ESC 6 1/11 3/6 Selects the character set B. 8.7.3 Select All Characters Set ESC | Pnl Pn2 1/11 §/12 *** *** This escape sequence selects the All Characters Set as the active character set. This set has no control characters but rather contains extra characters in some of the locations (addresses) where control characters appear in sets A and B. A space is printed for any undefined character address which is received. Pnl and Pn2 represent the number of characters that follow that are to be printed from the All Characters Set. Pnl represents values from 0 — 255 | Pn2 represents values equal to (Pn2 x 256), where Pn2 can be 0 or greater integer. Total characters = Pnl + (Pn2 x 256) e 154 ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION 8.7.4 Print Single Character From All Character Set ESC ° 1/11 5/14 This sequence allows the next character to be accessed and printed from the All Characters Set. 8.8 PRINTING MODES This section describes the various text printing modes and text enhancements that the LA75 printer (in IBM emulation) features. Menu feature selection #20 determines if the mode selected by the ESC G or ESC I 2 sequences is the Letter Quality (LQ) or Near Letter Quality (NLQ) printing. NOTE: Any downline-loaded font selected by the ESC I 6 sequence will always be created in the NLQ mode. regardless of the menu selection. 8.8.1 Draft Printing This low-resolution matrix is based on a 9 x 9 standard-sized character font table. Draft printing speed is 250 char/sec maximum. 8.8.2 LQ Printing This high-resolution matrix is based on a 27 x 18 standard-sized character font table. This font is created with two one-third speed passes in the same direction. LQ printing speed is 32 characters/second maximum. 8.8.3 NLQ Printing NLQ printing is created with an algorithm applied to the draft font data. This print mode is created with two half-speed passes in the same direction. Effectively. this mode will darken a draft character by filling in between the dots. NLQ printing speed is 42 characters/second maximum. 8.8.4 Shadow Bold Printing Features You can select shadow bold printing if the current font is draft. NLQ, or LQ. ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION 155 8.8.4.1 Shadow Bolded Draft - It is created at half-speed with one pass. The printer performs horizontal shadowing at 125 characters/second. NOTE: No vertical shadowing is performed. 8.8.4.2 Shadow Bolded NLQ - It is created at half-speed with two passes. The printer performs both horizontal and vertical shadowing. 8.8.4.3 Shadow Bolded LQ - It is created at half-speed with two passes. The printer performs horizontal shadowing. 8.8.5 Superscript and Subscript The superscript and subscript functions both print half-size (1/16-inch) charac- ters slightly offset from the current line. Superscript prints in the upper half of a character cell. to allow printing of exponential expressions and footnotes. Subscript prints in the lower half of a character cell, to allow printing of mathematical equations and scientific expressions. Superscript and subscript are available in all modes and pitches. A single algorithm is used for draft. NLQ. and LQ printing. Shadow bolding of superscripts and subscripts is supported with the draft bolding algorithm. 8.8.6 Selecting Printing Modes The following escape sequences control the printing functions. 8.8.6.1 Enable Shadow Bold (EREBD) ESC E 1/11 4/5 Sets shadow bold printing for all following characters. 8.8.6.2 Disable Shadow Bold (ERDBD) ESC F 1/11 4/6 Turns off shadow bold printing for all following characters. 8.8.6.3 Set Letter Quality/NLQ Printing (EREHR) ESC G /11 4/7 Enters LQ or 156 NLQ mode depending on menu feature setting #20. ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION 8.8.6.4 Set Draft (ERDHR) ESC H 1/11 4/8 Enters draft mode. 8.8.6.5 Select Print Quality ESC 1/11 Ps 1 4/9 *** You can use this sequence to select the priht quality where "Ps” parameter determines the required print quality. , Ps = Selects draft mode. 0 0/0 Selects LQ/NLQ mode. 2 0/2 4 Selects draft mode. 0/4 Uses downline-loaded set (Section 8.11) 6 0/6 Selects NLQ mode. Uses downline-loaded set (Section 8.11) 8.8.6.6 Set/Reset Underline (EREUL) ESC — Ps 1/11 2/13 *** If Ps = 1 (0/1), it underlines all characters that follow this sequence. If Ps = 0 (0/0). it turns off underlining. 8.8.6.7 Set/Reset Overscore ESC — Ps 1/11 5/15 *** it overscores all characters that follow this sequence. If Ps = 1 (0/1). If Ps = 0 (0/0). it turns off overscore. 8.8.6.8 Enable Superscript/Subscript (ERESCR) ESC S Ps /11 5/3 *** If Ps = 0 (0/0). all following characters are printed in superscript mode. It Ps = 1 (0/1), all following characters are printed in subscript mode. 8.8.6.9 Reset Script (ERDSCR) ESC T 1/11 5/4 Cancels superscript and subscript printing. 8.9 PRINTING MODE RULES AND EXCEPTIONS The following are exceptions or clarifications to printing mode combinations. 1. [f both the 12 cpi and the compressed modes are active, the printer B sets the pitch to 12 cpi only. Setting the printer to 12 cpi pitch cancels the compressed mode. 2. Compressed (17.1 or 8.55 cpi) printing cannot be shadow bolded. If R both are active, the printer runs at the previous pitch (5 or 10 cpi) and the previous print density (draft, NLQ/LQ) with shadow bold set. Compressed printing will take effect when shadow bolding is removed. 3. NLQ and LQ printing can be compressed. Printing is darker than draft compressed. 4. Double-width printing is available for all pitches (10, 12, compressed), print densities (draft, NLQ. and LQ), and their superscripts s and subscripts. Double-width printing can also be shadow bolded for all pitches and print densities except the compressed pitch. 8.10 GRAPHIC MODE O The host computer sends graphic data to the printer as a string of 8-bit characters. An escape sequence before these characters defines how many characters follow. You can select the graphic mode with the escape sequences described below. After executing the escape sequence. the printer returns to text mode. The number of graphic bytes to print must equal the number specified. If the actual number of bytes differs from the number specified. the printer may (1) interpret text characters as graphic data. or (2) interpret graphic data as text. 158 ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION [ 8.10.1 Escape K (480 Bit-image Graphic Mode) This sequence changes printing from the text mode to the bit-image graphic mode at 60 dots per inch (dpi) resolution. At every horizontal position. each byte can print up to 8 vertical dots. Each bit in a graphic data byte addresses a single printhead pin. The most significant bit (MSB) addresses the top printhead pin. while the least significant bit (LSB) addresses the bottom printhead pin. Bit-image data may be mixed with text data on the same line. ESC 1/11 K 4/2 Pnl *%% Pn2 *%% vl kkx v2 #k% ... vk *% % Pnl and Pn2 are data bytes which specify the number of bit image data bytes to be transferred. vl through vk are the the bytes of the bit-image data. The number of bit-image data bytes (k) is equal to Pnl + (256 x Pn2) but cannot exceed 480 bytes. Pnl represents values from 0 — 255. Pn2 represents values (0 or 1) x 256. If the specified number of bytes exceeds the maximum number of printable bytes in a certain graphic mode, the excess graphic data is not printed. These characters. however, shall be counted in order to properly exit the graphic mode. Example: If 500 bytes are specified in 480 bit image graphic mode. the first 480 bytes will be printed and the remaining 20 bytes will be ignored before exiting the graphic mode. 8.10.2 Escape L (960 Bit-lmage Graphic Mode/Half-Speed) 1/11 4/3 *#*% #%% kkk kxk I Pnl represents values from 0 — 255. Pn2 represents values (0.1.2,3) x 256. This sequence changes printing from the text mode to the bit-image graphic mode at a 120 dpi resolution. Data input is the same as for ESC K command. The number of bytes of bit-image data (k) is equal to Pnl + (256 x Pn2) but cannot exceed 960. The 960 bit-image graphic mode mperates‘at half the speed of the 480 bit-image graphic mode. All horizontal dots are addressable in this mode. 8.10.3 Escape Y (960 Bit-lmage Graphic Mode — Normal Speed) This sequence allows printing at the same speed as the 480 bit-image graphic mode. ESC Y Pnl Pn2 vl v2 1/11 5/9 * % k * &k * %k %k * % ok ... vk * %k %k Pnl represents values from 0 — 255. Pn2 represents values (0.1.2,3) x 256. e This sequence changes printing from the text mode to the bit-image graphic mode at a 120 dpi resolution. Data input is the same as for ESC K command. The number of bytes of bit-image data (k) is equal to Pnl + (256 x Pn2) but cannot exceed 960. Consecutive horizontal dots cannot be addressed at 120 dpi at this speed. Thus. only the first of two consecutive horizontal dots is printed. 8.10.4 Escape Z (1920 Bit-Image Graphic Mode) This sequence changes printing from the text mode to bit-image graphic mode o at 240 dpi resolution. Data input is the same as for ESC K command. The number of bytes of bit-image data (k) is equal to Pnl + (256 x Pn2) but cannot exceed 1920. ESC Z Pnl Pn2 vl v2 1/11 5/10 #%* *%% kx% *xxk .. vk * % & Pnl represents values from 0 — 255. Pn2 represents values from (0—7) x 256. The printing shall be at half the speed of the 480 bit image graphic mode. Consecutive horizontal dots cannot be addressed at 240 dpi at this speed. The first of two consecutive horizontal dots will only be printed. s 160 ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION You can use this sequence to initiate character downline-loading. The sequence is self-terminating; it exits after a specified number of characters have been received. You can definea maximum of 94 downline-load characters. Both draft and NLQ downline-load fonts are created from an 11-byte pattern. The character(s) need only be downline-loaded once. If the NLQ downline-load font is selected (< ESC> I 6), the enhanced algorithm will be applied to the downline-load font data. If the draft downline-load font is selected (<ESC> I 4). the downline-loaded font data will be translated directly. The downline-load sequence format is as follows: ESC 1/11 = 3/13 Pnl **¥ Pn2 *** DC4 Pn3 ¥¥x* ]/4 To figure out how many bytes you will need to downline-load the font data. you have to find the numeric parameters for the downline-load sequence. The numeric parameters Pnl and Pn2 specify the number of informational bytes that will follow, where Pnl = 0 to 255 and Pn2 = (Pn2 x 256) and Pn2 can be equal to O or a greater integer. In data string, each downline-loaded character contains 11 font data bytes preceded by two attribute bytes. Two additional bytes, DC4 and Pn3. precede all character data. | Therefore. you can calculate the total number of bytes as follows: 1. Number of character bytes = 2 + (number of characters x 13) 2. The total number of bytes is encoded with Pnl and Pn2 as Total bytes = Pnl + (Pn2 x 256). If number of character bytes is 255 or less, Pnl parameter is used and Pn2 = 0. If Pnl is greater than 255, Pn2 is equal or greater than 1 and both Pnl and Pn2 are used. Example: If you want to downline-load ten characters. you will need the following number of bytes: Character bytes = 2 + (10 x 13) = 132 (bytes) Total Number of bytes = 132 + (0 x 256) = 132 (bytes) The Pn3 parameter specifies the character address of the first downline-loaded character. If more than one character is downline-loaded, incremental address locations are filled. Characters may only be downline-loaded into address positions 2/1 to 7/14 (ASCII 7-bit printables). If an illegal address is reached at some point during the sequence, the remaining bytes will be counted to terminate the sequence properly, but are not downline-loaded. Font data received before the illegal address was reached will be saved. Character data following the sequence set-up is of the following form. Attribute Character Pn4d NUL vl v2Z k% ())() * & K** ... vll * % %k Each character is preceded by the Pn4 parameter and NUL. Attribute is set by Pn4 as follows. Pn4 =0 | character is ascending (uses top 8 wires of printhead) 0/0 Pn4 = 128 character is descending (uses bottom 8 wires) 8/0 Bytes v1 through v11 are bit-map font data. They address the printhead pins the same way as the four graphic modes. Each of the 11 bytes constitutes 1/12 of the horizontal character cell. When used in the draft mode. consecutive horizontal dots will not be printed. When used in the NLQ mode, all dots are printed AND the NLQ algorithm is used. When the downline-load font is selected, only those printable characters which were downline-loaded are addressable. All control codes corresponding to the current character set remain active. (If the Character Set A is the active set, all CO and C1 control codes remain in effect.) Any other undefined printable addresses. including ALL 8-bit printable addresses, perform a space <SP > function. Additional downline-load sequences may overwrite current downline-load data. Any current downline-load data at addresses which are not redefined remain in the downline-load buffer. The entire downline-load data buffer is cleared with the following sequence: 162 ESC = NUL NUL /11 3/13 0/0 0/0 ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION APPENDIX This appendix shows the character sets (Figures A-1 through A-20) supported by the LA75 Companion printer in DEC-compatible mode. Figure Character Set Page A-1 U.S. ASCII Character Set 164 165 A-2 United Kingdom Character Set A-3 Dutch Character Set 166 A-4 Finnish Character Set 167 A-5 French Character Set 168 A-6 French Canadian Character Set 169 A-T German Character Set 170 A-8 Italian Character Set 171 A-9 ‘Japanese (JIS Roman) Character Set Katakana Character Set 172 A-10 A-11 DEC Norwegian/Danish Character Set 174 A-12 ISO Norwegian/Danish Character Set 175 A-13 Portuguese Character Set 176 A-14 Spanish Character Set 177 A-15 DEC Supplemental Character Set 178 A-16 Swedish Character Set 179 ‘A-17 Swiss Character Set 180 173 A-18 DEC Technical Character Set 181 A-19 VT100 Line Drawing Character Set 182 A-20 ISO Supplemental Character Set 183 NOTE: Additional character sets (fonts) are available if you use plug-in font cartridges. 163 | N sgelsvs|snslene|soajsssiessas] s R = R BRZINN UGB S e R BE R B e o oo ASCII CHARACTER | ESC Figure A-1 U.S. ASCII Character Set 164 APPENDIX A TM COLUMN 0 , BITS ROW | B4 83 B2 B B? | O HE 1 0 g5 0 loooo NUL 00 1 1000 1 1 2 106010 3 00 1 1 3 4 g 100 5 o1 0 1 6 0 [ o o 3 w|10 W i Pm% 1 SP 21 ! O ||30 41 ‘ 61 a3 1 A 50 62 63 51 c 4 64 52 5 5 5 6 2 mm:% a 4 8 6 , 7 27 |7 7 o111 |BEL 23 8 l1000 4 1 0 0 1 10 |+ 01 0 14 c ¢ 7 47 39 17 30 B8 18 HT 11 n 25 ) - LF |12 32 10 sus 26 * 1M1 01 1 vT | | 1211 100 ; 11B ESC 1827 4 12 34 8 ¥ 15 Bl o] . | 5 T el20 * 56 g 9 , 19 i A FF 1A ES CR |3») : B 1D : |270 a7 q 113 142 88 r 162 143 40 s 104 a8 65 5335 E 66 F G |s H a 122 82 b 123 83 ¢ T v s 84 d 144 0o t 164 106 69 45 u 125 8555 @ 145 10165 § u 165 106 v 126 1 f 146 v 166 167 71 43 44 70 a6 107 51 52 | 86 56 110 |5 X 1 111 73 J 1mzf 5938 K « B0 L = 75 51 9 57 52 38 38 42 . | 8 43 . 28 54 ' 73 44 ; 74 24 72 58 3A ac s3f Efl w 41 161 81 41 42 55 70 ¢ P n 8 p.:] sl 141 3 w| 28 60 121 67 37 50 P | 50 80 103 67 1 sal R 36 1 0 40 71 27 ( | , 7 8 CAN | >, 14 i1 1 10 |10 « 7 7 1 101 102 54 ! 1 1 a 66 M 6 ] Q 33 4 5 1 65 32 3 BS @ 31 2 ‘mae G 1 || 20 2 o110 1311 01 1 ) 4 1 49 1 17 0 127 81 &2 63 &4 102 66 147 71 114 72 163 15 73 116 74 1775 118 7 87 g9 103 w 130 ] P | 0] 150 X Y \ 1311 i 151 y 171 74 . z 132 § ‘1852 z 172 13 j 133 91 k 153 107 { 173 9y 1 108 ' 174 47 48 49 4 7% [ % \ 4B 11 4C 57 58 89 59 90 5A 58 134 5C 67 68 108 69 |- 106 6A 68 154 6C 156 119 77 170§ 120 78 121 79 122 1A 12378 124 7C el 115 1 |6l m | e } 60 175 30 M| 4D 135 76 116 A 136 176 50 SO 14 36 f 17 ary 57 77 117 137 187 177 F 1F ] . 2F 3F 4F &F BF 7F 30 E 1E ol 46 2E > 62 3€ N 78 4E o4 SE n 156] 110 BE one 125 0 16 126 7€ Ay RS - , ASCH CHARACTER} ESC 111 | COLUMN/ROW 53 | octar TMTM HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES FROM ASCHI 27 § DECIMAL 18 HE X BB, T BN Figure A-2 United Kingdom Character Set 165 COLUMN 0 ‘ ‘ B7 rOw | B4 B3 B2 B1 | g5 0 1 0 7 0 0 0 ‘ 4] 1 ) . 0 20 NUL 0 10001 1 2 Joo v 2 2 3 /o011 3 4 0 1 00 4 o1 0 1 5 5 21 15 25 6 |o 110 [ 26 6 16 7 o1 1} 1 5 8 16 SP 1 2 17 ‘ ! 33 22 42 . 18 " 12 | pCc3l B ngfl 1 2 3 49 34 2 £ 43 3 20 $ 36 4 25 9 45 ar ; S 65 53 E 105 46 6 66 ' 106 70 v w | 107 13 24 4 14 5 6 20 21 2 35 23 44 24 ’ 39 7 10 N 50 | 23 7 |1000|BS 17 |s8 |CANI | 18 a7 € |&]| 8 , 28 |1 00 1 HT | 25 ) 101010 LF 12 |SUB | 2 2 1A % vt | 3 | ESC 33 8 18 14 34 g |0A 1" S 123 83 143 w| S 163 124 144 164 33 35 » || 38 71 30 y 56 1511 1 1 1 St | 5 17 a7 F 1F | / al ASCII CHARACTER] ESC 1D 1E 31 2D 2E 2F | 146 v 166 55 86 56 127 102 147 130 150 103 67 ws] ¥ 171 69 132 % 172 [7a] 4h, 75 4B 114 5A ’%i | 80 L ) Ve |a| M|y | 62 76 N 77 O 3E 3F 77 170 59 153 30 118 89 133 3c 75 167 49 113 74 ‘ X | 120 78 ' 38 76 w e 68 152 K 75 118 161 Z | g 59 117 58 48 [T 74 86 87 57 116 65 112 | 36 126 J | 16 101 165 72 ? 14 a5 u 64 2 73 73 145 L 38 72 115 t 54 f X 7 114 63 57 57 SO |2 62 113 100 125 - 98 131 > 14 1 110 2 56 47 53 84 61 m 46 - 1c 35 H 46 | 52 u S | 110 = 29 45 70 37 s| c 15 68 w < - 44 51 T n 44 | CR|G 68 G ’ w0 43 104 67 3A \ 67 56 28 54 42 F . 28 0 41 54 53 FF | 2 E 103 51 + 1211 100 D ¢ 32 ss] ' 162 63 . 43 r - 82 52 27 q 70 R 42 2A 97 161 66 9 2 122 112 B 41 19 Q P 50 36 27 51 1M1 01 1 31 26 65 2 160 w| 142 34 27 81 14 80 102 LY BEL |7 60 P | A 64 38 50 64 40 1 140 101 3 _ /) 120 A &1 & 11 9 30 22 7 1 o0 62 4 41 ~ 1 3 | (XOFF) | 19 Y 0 60 34 1 32 1 48 10 , 1 1 i 40 o ooo 0 1 ac | 115 4D 1ef 78 4E 117 79] 4F 91 58 w6 BA 107§ 68 134 164 5C 135 6C 156 92 93 5D A | 136 94 5E 79 |12 TA 173 ee 123 78 174 108 f w00] 14 | 125 | 156] 176 6D 124 7C 175 70 110 126 6E 137 167 5F 6F o | 95 121 7€ | m‘DEL 177 127 7F LI 1/11 | coLumN/ROW 33 | ocTAL 27 ] 18 DECIMAL HEX BAOL 7247 B Figure A-3 Dutch Character Set 166 APPENDIX A COLUMN , 0 " ‘ . 0 00 0 0 MUL - ¢ ' Ay [ P - . b | i - 32 0 a8 10 20 30 21 a1 61 1 11 2 22 21 " 18 (0011 3 33 r'xif%% 1913 # 4 01 0o 4 20 $ & |o 1 0 1 5 5 25 5 15 21 % 6 |01 10 6 % 2 12 lpcal 4 24 | P 112 70 161 41 62 102 50 B 43 35 23 3 63 51 33 c 36 4 52 D 32 6 | 7 66 R 03] 6743 s 68 T a2 104 162 52 123 8353 ¢ 84 d 85 e 124 35 E | 69 u 125 25 S 65 & a6 38 6 66 F 108 70 v 126 47 7 G 07 ] w ar 45 , 53 g | 105 45 55 167 |1too00 ) 51 41 o &7 I i |52 42 : 72 58 J j 53 . 73 K k BS 1t 0 0 1 HT CAN| ; vT FF 13 |1 1 01 CR 141 110 SO 1B Sl ( 18 9 3t 9 19 12 [SUB | 32| 26 * A 1A 13 |ESC| 3] « 25 LF 10 M 12|t 100 11 |8 1 | 11 E%C 27 w|28 24 1”% 34 | 54 c 1C 2¢ , 35 29 . 13 D 14 F 1711 | coLumn/r AsCIl CHARACTER| ESC | '/ 33 ] OCTAL /ROW 27 § DECIMAL 18 a8 74 = 61 75 TMM m 46 > 76 62 \ N " 57 ? 63 77 0 ° 45 47 2F 3D ! 1 3E 68 1186 | 77 170} X |278 Yy 171 121 , 56 ac ol 106 1 2€ 1F 59 67 151 L 1E / 39 b 60 56 n H 71 7] < 36 37 15 | 38 w 44 20 kBN 17 W - 1D % | ' &a_ sy 70 3A 43 B 118 8 2 14 12 37 75 W 80 55 165 || | 27 17 @ 30 10 39 116 u 147 B 17 56 127 101 145 164 102 66 23 7 86 | t 1573 f |BEL|~” 46 100 144 163 166 o111 67 s v ’ 36 72 | 99 63 146 27 26 143 65 16 17 54 114 66 19 1 01 1 22 B4 40 2 a4 1 101 34 22 23 @ 1 3N 42 7 0 1 3 10 |1 010 ' $p 6 o 1 O 2 9 ' 16 B 1 0 0010 8 s 1 o 4 0 2 7 3 0 0 i » 2 0 ROW | B4 B3 B2 B1 | g5 | 1 B7 4 ‘ 3F 157 | 111 DEL 6F | 177 | 127 7F HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES FROM ASCI| | HEX AR, . T TOE ;v' ¥ L1 » ‘l" ‘ Figure A-4 Finnish Character Set | | APPENDIX A 167 COLUMN ] B? B& 85 0 1 O 0 2 4 3 0 1] 1 0 1 1 o 1 (XON) 1 2 2. 3 3 1DC3 3 | IXOFF) 3 4 4 5 % 6 6 6 4 7 6 ) 16 60 161 a7 13 R 122 142 162 s |2 83 53 143 99 63 T 124 144 54 64 38 2 116 125 145 165 17 166 118 67 G 127 17 27 | 30 50 10 55 37 55 56 8 18 28 38 58 9 HT 1n 31 51 71 10 | 11 12 13 14 15 25 41 9 42 . Efifil 27 53 " 34 54 1c 2C 19 29 | 32 LF 10 sus 2 52 14 A : 11R] A VT | FF . 13 4] 8 el 18 14 12 28 c 15 35 E 1€ St 59 38 74 60 75 1F 2F oCTAL K 133 ; F | J 713 < 57 COLUMN/ROW 58 132 55 37 ASCIt CHARACTER I 72 44 17 n ’ 2B s| 20 56 4 1) 57 3A 43 2 10 36 30 CR | 33 N 30 1614 , S = > 2€ a7 ? 130 131 39 ac |a| 30 7% 67 3E 77 63 3F § 75 57 | 9 65 87 ge |, 74 146 102 7 12 164 100 1ot 23 AN 114 72 163 115 73 85 47 10 84 98 62 T 126 86 % 7 82 52 61 F 27 39 51 70 66 54 7 BEL | 7 f | 1 141 U o46 1 81 . > ’ 50 4 5 ; 121 Q 3 2 7 1 89 59 80 BA 91 58 134 L 92 5C 136 93 %0 136 24 M N o S5E : 137 95 5F HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES FROM ASCH DECIMAL HEX QUOTATION MARKS () ARE USED AS AN APPROXIMATION FOR THE DIAERESIS MARK (), COLUMN 7/ROW 14, P PEITE Figure A-5 French Character Set g COLUMN 4] BITS ROW | B4 B3 B2 B1 | ps 0 0 1 3 4 000 40 1 101 1 7 0011 2 2 12 Ipc3| 3 3 4 mm?& 13 19 , # 43 24 20 " $ 23 44 4 5 14 25 55 6 6 ot 10 6 8 1011 1] BEL]|? g8 1000 8 1T 0 01 ;‘ 7 |BS oy 10 HT 11 LF | 100|101 0 % 2 & 27 r 26 16 17 7 2116 23 17 N30 66 R 51 ~ c 1103} 67 @ 52 : D 43 104 68 T 53 E 69 u 66 : F 55 G |ESC| . ! 59 73 K & 74 L 44 ol *‘:fl 13 29 ; s _ | % D 16 1D 36 0 56 17 37 15 31 F 1F ESC COLUMN/ROW OCTAL | 43 ' St 132 | 53 2% ic 1|1 111 i 4 12 c 30 I: 89 J 7 ] K ¥ | | g / 75 = , %6 2 > 57 47 2F 60 o § ? L M 62 3 N 77 63 3F 54 wl BA 99 163 63 144 100 73 164 64 145 118 74 166 101 115 17 7% 146 166 147 167 102 66 11876 o] 133 1ol k 134 1 92 5C s|] 30 76 f 9 n 58 143 65 21 58 ~ , 14 € 57 72 41 SO el : 38 A , ‘ 86 56 127 42 34 14 |1 1 1 0 126 |52 14 |15 &5 13 F? ; 85 e 1 . CR d 3 |3 1301101 70 46 | B4 54 125 9 51 vT 00 ; ¢ 41 | 29 vr |3 67 37 28 ~ 1M1 011 54 38 106 72 83 53 124 130 27 mmwlfi 47 45 114 52 |123} H 3] lsuB | 2] 39 7 38 26 44 108 S 71 || % 2 A 6 35 *}fi 13 70 % 3 46 A4 65 41 Q 8: ) 19 S a7 25 : 162 B 33 64 4 24 45 || 2% @g 1 k. 50 € 18 3 70 161 102 63 27 |5 |CAN|| 8 35 112 . 85 22 & 4 $ o1 o1 1 A 1 3 ASCII CHARACTER| 6 a4 0 .00 1.0 1 -3 - 2 11 3 0 100 12 2 0 0 00 1 2 1 |80 o =] o3| M 94 o n 50 136 137 95 5F , o "7 HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES FROM ASCHI DECIMAL HE X ‘ WA T HETE Figure A-6 French Canadian Character Set APPENDIX A 169 COLUMN 0 BITS B6 | 87 0 ROW | B4 83 B2 B1 | gg ' 1 O 0 0 20 0 10 o000 NUL 0 T J]0o 0 o0 1 1 1 th%? y 1 2 1 1 e | O 0 . 0 2 0 | 6| SP 21 17 1 49 18 " 42 34 2 62 50 B 102 23 \ 43 35 63 51 c 03] , 23 44 3 36 4 52 D a5 37 5 53 E 108 38 6 54 F 1 21 3 00 1 1 3 3 mbcwg 19 # 4 o100 4 20 $ 5 01 0 1 5 25 8 g 1 1 0 5 6 6 15 2% 12 13 24 14 6 | 710111 | BEL|, % 22 & 27 ’ 23 7 22 21 16 7 39 8 CAN 24 ( BS 9 1 0 0 1 HT 1" ] 31 25 Y l |1 01 0 LF 12 10 |SUB | 32 26 % 1111 01 1 vT 3 |ESC | 27 121110 0 FF 12 CR 1301101 14 1 1 1 0 ' ‘ SO 7 50 |1 000 48 [ P 30 B1 3 32 33 64 34 65 35 66 36 : 27 10 ‘ 2 46 47 8 10 24 2% 17 | 30 20 33 2 5 67 55 37 70 A : G 40 8 56 H 41 51 9 71 l 52 42 . 72 + 53 ) ' 50 ¢ 28 1c ’ 44 < 60 L 16 5 |s] | = 75 10 36 T 5% D 16 2ol s] E 30 1E * 46 > 62 37 / |l 8 18 9 19 . S B 14 14 17 St | i asciicHaRACTER| ESC 2 n| F 1F | '/ | COtUMNROW 33 | ocTaL 27 { DECIMAL 18 57 28 2 0 56 2€ 57 @ Q 50 60 9 112 121 81 141 97 161 142 80 51 66 R 122 67 S 68 T 69 u 70 \ 42 43 104 a4 45 106 46 107 61 83 143 163 53 124 99 63 144 73 164 52 84 62 100 3E 77 3F 116 64 85 145 165 55 126 86 § 65 146 102 75 166 56 m 66 7 w 87 72 ¥ X 130 150 Tk Y 131 57 88 58 88 : 103 67 104 68 151 105 74 117 118 76 167 119 77 170) 120 78 171 121 69 78 162 106 172 107 173 153 30 76 72 18 54 : ac 14 125 K 74 71 123 10 ] 48 113 162 147 73 70 98 127 47 160 82 73 T | ‘es 2F 65 140 J 38 | 101 120 58 34 43 54 ; 38 a9 2, 18 34 13 181 1 1 1 28 1A 11 1 60 a1 o 4 1 ! oo 3 4 40 0 1 o 2 x| 1 0 4 1 32 22 2 3 0 6A 68 154 122 74 123 8 174 108 124 M 155 109 175 N 110 60 E 156 70 176 126 } o 6C 6E 7C 125 7E 157 | 177 6F 7F 11 127 HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES FROM ASCII HEX Bl - 74230 Figure A-7 German Character Set 170 APPENDIX A COLUMN 0 | , BITS 87 0 o loe ROW | B4 B3 B2BY |s NUL 0 1 00 01 1 4 0 6| SP 17 ! 10 (XON} 1 : 1 - 49 0 113 2 62 R 162 33 21 34 n 50 4 32 63 51 64 3 & 4 3624 5 45 g; 5 53 66 6 o110 [ : 71 114 72 163 15 S 73 T 823 4 6 o101 70 33 23 44 65 a5 u i 84 124 54 54 f 7 67 9 ' 39 30 27 565 | 50 37 185 v 166 64 5 6 7 u 146 47 10 %23 145 38 3 164 e 7 6 t 144 6 B 74 17 15 118 % 119 167 77 1701 70 8 18 1 0 0 1 HT 11 9 n 25 ) 51 41 9 57 71 i 171 wlio010]| LF 12 | |sSUB | 32| 2 % a2 |52 « | 58 i 172 | 1111 011 vr |3 |ESC| 27 8| + 43 |8 . 73 1211 100 r o 14 12 34 44 < 60 1 124 15 1 ’ 74 c 28 54 k1:} k 173 ‘ 59 s _ | 56 20 m 175 D = 75 9 131101 w1110 scit CHARACT CHARACTERE ASClI FF CR A 1A 11 B 29 D 16 36 80|53 ol : 17 a7 | F 1F § E 1E 1/11 §| COLUMN/ROW | ocrad 27 | DECIMAL 18 | HEX 38 2A 18 13 ESC | 28 116 100 d 46 710111 | BEL ]| , 12 30 22 43 35 g ‘ P 0 2 3 3 3 01 00 48 32 20 42 2 oot 1 o 1 2 o0 1 b 7 6 ] 3 0 , 1 |oooo , 3 2 0 . 0 0o 2 1 0 o 3A 28 2 sl - , ’ 56 61 7% el 2| e n 571 ' 2€ | 3E 2F IF 77 122 , 3C K153 78 121 TA 123 78 174 7C 125 70 176 1571 6F 3 126 7E 177 7F 1 HIGHLIGHTS DIF FERENCES FROM ASCI ; LLE T ke Figure A-8 Italian Character Set 171 COLUMN | 0 ROW| | ,m'rs 87 4 0 B4 B3B2BY fgs 0o loooo 1 |0 00 1 2 o010 3 4 | 1 | | 2 NUL 0 . 1 J‘BC mflm} 21 | 42 2 18 12 3 B _ m&m w | # 13 11 24 5 o1 0 1 B 45 25 2115 % 6 01 1 0 6 65 26 2216 & 7 o111 |BEL|; 27 23 ’ 8 1 000 10 | e 30 : 3 18 4 zf ] , ; B ; 2 A | 131101 14 {1 1 10 1 1 1 1 ascit cHARACTER| 26 27 + 1A 34 25 S 65 38 6 54 47 7 87 37 48, 2% w| 50 5335 66 28 | 42 | 36 |52 1 42 | 3] 43 28 18 CR D 1D 29 $0 14 30 * Si 17 37 F 1F 1E 31 52 67 S 68 T 43 104 % 123 83 c 84 d 53 124 54 u 125 E F 106 v 126 G 107 LW 127 a7 57 H 1mof 6945 70 46 72 i , 7 162 ‘ 163 81 |e| 82 143 99 63 144 s 70 113 71 s | 72 115 100 B4 e 145 86 f 146 102 - ISl 9 | . 130 | h 8555 X 161 142 D 6] aa 10165 i 66 147 87 55 1 150 104 68 33 § OCTAL 27 | pecimaL K z [ | i 182 k 153 | 106 6A 107 68 1 8C M m | 00 48 N n 110 o 157 26 57 47 o 2F g, 188 45 20 / J , w00 V ESC | /' | COLUMNROW 6D 8E 111, 6F} HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES | FROM ASCH 1B | HEX APPENDIX A |&] 105 Figure A-9 Japanese (JIS Roman) Character Set 172 51 122 B |03 D W 40 24 - ! 52 i || 9 : % 35 16 ; c : 41 141 Rl 1C 3 45 51 i3 64 ' 27 15 13 4 24 ~ 32 102 12 &9 | ESC L¥ 36 63 a P 20 13 : $ B B 160 | 80 97 19 f S 3 |0l ETY) 80 | 50 Q 81 1181 10 vT 1"B 35 3 62 8| 40 0 65 1101 1 120] %1 LF 1M1 01 1 , A . 0 a1 |SUB | 32| ' 43 23 44 CAN 24§ “ 11 2 22 17 8 u|l 81 P 7 1 . 1 48 1 21 . 20 18] a1 22 3 4 »1_ T 2 3 | pC3| ‘ 2 49 ! ) BS ot 33 17 1 ' 60 3z 3 (0100 a0 6 1 0 » /0011 {1 0 1 0 5 1 e T : 4 | 4 10 3 , WA - TDATH s - M ® . i -~ ‘ s | o ’ 21 o i i “ b , i - - - |> 23| 44 36 . |wlwes| % | 14 10008 < 101 0 o 46 | 246 |38]|16e 2a7 ||As 247 I B4 |53 | e 35 | 88 511 9 261) |ale| T g ' 104 | 304 : .1 T %67 |86 | 267 106 | 308 % |cs 107 | 307 | ws| 54 | 254 | |«|m| 2¢ | ac 55 | 255 ‘ 1 118 , | 56 | 266 74 | 274 ||| 3¢| sc 76| 276 7% | 215 611 180 T | e wma| t7 | 62| w 57| 267 17| 217 3F| BF] 2| ‘*9 AE arf s EF LEGEND COPES_ CHARACTER W1 9: S, 45| 173 j 1101 |13 " , | 38 | BB 28 | AB & 111 0|14 | s|e| |e|m| o i AF 3| ) BE| 63| 191 47 C7 110 | 310 72 | 200 48 | cg 13 | 241 < 84 | 212 54 | D4 125 | 325 85 | 213 5 | DS 126 | 326 86 | 214 — 7 U s | D6 E2 72 | F2] 115 | 243 99 | 227 63 | €3 144 | 344 00 | 228 64 | E4 145 | 346 101 | 220 65 | E5 146 | 346 102 | 230 6 | Eo | 73| F3 164 | 364 116 | 244 74 | Fa 165 | 365 17 | 245 75 | F5 166 | 366 118 | 246 | F6 127 | 327 147 | 347 167 | 367 57 | D71 130 | 330 67|E7 150 | 350 7l F7 170} 370 g7 | 216 88 | 216 58 | D8 103 | 231 104 | 232 68 | E8 119 | 247 120 | 248 8| g 121| 249 [] | 912w 163 |353 107 | 235 173 | 373 123 | 251 114 | 314 134 | 334 154 | 354 174 | 374 131 | 331 L | se |21 ~ 5A80 || 218DA L/ 133 | 333 58| pB 105 | 233 6A | EA 106 | 234 68 | EB A1 FA 122 | 250 78| EB wl2oef ) | 2|20 108 | 236 124 | 252 15| 315| 135 | 335 93 | 156 | 356 109 | 237 175 | 375 136 | 336 156 | 356 176 | 376 6E | EE 7€ | FE ac | cc 5C | DC L ml 28] ! 53 | 03 124 | 324 114 | 242 163 | 363 62 13 | 313 s |208) 116 316 i 83 | 21 98 | 226 143 | 343 172 | 372 48 | cB N\ D2 152 | 352 4A74| | 202CA T) 52 132 | 332 73 | 201 B 7 82 | 210 123 | 323§ Fi 71 162 | 362 142 | 342 171 371, 12 | 312 ‘ - 122 | 322 151 | 351 111 | 311 ‘ 58 | 186 , BA ”, 3A1 f2Al 1170AAl :]B : 10! ,:l:.142 53 | 263 | |11] 199 71| _ «’v |wsl 0 72 | 272 52 | 262 || 45 | es| A || 44 | ca 6o by 56 | 184 71 | 2n e8 | 196 105 7 38 | B8 :E a3 | c3 I\ | 56 | 183 37 87 70 | 270 €2 67 | 195 54 | w82 ’) 28 | aB )( 43 66 | 266 fi 40 | 168 ~ 65 | 265 Jb 27 | A7 50 | 250 1 11 as 66 | 194 103 | 303 ‘y EQ 0 161 | 361 O 102 | 302 > 39 | w7 # o1 1 1|7 1oo1|@| ! 24| A4 7 o110|@) Az ; , '7 a5 | 245 | o 0101|858 r100fq2] Al a3 J oo1 1|3} ' E 22 | i ; 112 | 240 - ‘ 9 ; '{ s | 001 0|2 o1 00|44 Sun 42 1 1 ‘ GL |GR P o |B | 1 ‘ 41 ooo0 1|1 L4 ° 4E| CE 17| 317 79| 207 4F | CF " N ° 94 | 222 5E | DE 6c | EC 110 | 238 137 | 337 157 | 357 5F | DF 6F | EF 95 | 223 7¢| FC 126 | 253 126 | 254| 111 239 3 3 OCTAL 85 | 193 | DECIMAL 41 | c1} HEX RO # NOTE: s WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR, BIT B8 IS 1 (V2 ONLY). KAT““ANA Figure A-10 Katakana Character Set M- 1EB8 . COLUMN 0 BITS B6 B? ROW | B4 B3 B2 B1 | gs O 0 000 1 0 00 1 2 1001 0 010 0 5§ o1 0 1 6 (01 10 7 o131 1| 0 0 0 NUL 2 1 20 0 10 0 1 pe 3&? 1 SP 21 17 ! 22 T 2 12 3 3 mdcm 8 4 24 ‘ 23 13 4 20 5 25 4 14 5 21 5 15 6 2% 6 ’ 7 17 10 30 li0o0o|BS|[Y[CAN[®f s o 1 00 1 MT 8 18 11 31 9 19 9 1M 1 20 21 42 ‘ 2 43 3 35 23 44 k3 45 37 13 1" JESC | 3] + B 1B FF 14 12 34 28 ’ 44 , 15 35 - 55 14 1 1 1 0 1D SO 36 29 14 30 E 11- 2 T I | 1E 17 SI 37 18 3 F ASCII CHARACTER| ESC ‘ 1F 52 3l 43 28 54 ¢ 45 20 / 33 | ocTaL | DECIMAL 18§ 66 R 83 c 103 5 32 51 33 B4 52 34 65 53 66 56 46 2E §7 47 2F 36 55 70 o E 65 41 42 67 43 104 68 44 105 69 45 F G 106 Q : T v 107 w 46 Y X l v 58 J Z 73 K 1 160 96 P 112 81 141 1181 51 61 49 122 142 60 2 82 97 98 v 99 s 52 62 123 83 143 53 63 124 144 84 54 70 113 71 162 114 72 115 163 73 100 t 145 64 164 116 74 85 101 u 165 126 146 v 166 55 70 1 oo | 140 125 u H 71 57 72 2A . B 102 39 | 42 /11 § COLUMN/ROW 27 9 29 , D 0 86 56 127 65 17 75 102 66 118 76 147 167 wil W | e ] 38 51 vT 13 50 : 31 k¥ 41 111 0 1 1 16 62 [2] |2] * CR 101 8 50 78 ’ A 5 27 ¢ 61 49 67 14 11 1 01 7 1 P 30 7 2 26 1C 5 48 47 30 |SUB | 32 C 5 0 1 60 54 A 1 100 1 6 10 12 4 0 1 38 12 27 7 46 LF S 4 24 | ‘ 34 |10 1 0 10 , &5 o 2% 27 16 iz 33 % 7 23 40 s & 7 1 0 22 # 22 6 BEL]| 16 18 3 0 PSR " 2 2 3 1 0 0 1 3100 11 4 1 0 0 3A . ' 59 38 74 < 60 L = 75 M ac 61 30 > ? 76 62 3E 77 63 3IF ‘ N 0 ‘ 157 | o 111 DEL BF 177 127 7F HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES ‘ FROM ASCIl HEX WA TRV Figure A-11 DEC Norwegian/Danish Character Set 174 APPENDIX A g COLUMN 0 1 2 4 3 0 ROW | B4 B3B2B1 fgs ' : i R 1 /0001 2° | 3 NUL | 0 ’;A (XON) w] 10 |6a]| 40 ; 101 AlG]l : 41 61 120 P | o 50 gg B 1;; R # 35 ' 3 83 51 ~ 103 67 ¢ S 123 ol 8 %] 4 || Plla| 5 5 5| 21 o g 25 |65 53 E 15 (45| a7 || 69 6 ] 2% 38 6 54 F 106 7 : | BEL]|7 16 & 66 6 22 46 27 23 ’ 47 47 7: fi;‘ G ( :; g&g 19 s ) 12 3 13 4 | 14 § BS 8 f?au CAN gg2 9 10 01 HT 10 |1 7 : 24 c 33 34 5 26 30 17 , | 60 141 || @ 61 r 83 ¢ 98 g 163 T (G| 9 || b |V u [=] 85 e [“] u ;?g ‘ 0 v 126 86 ¢ 146 102 v | 166 107 107 W 1 27 g 147 it w 167 o e X |2 157 pEL | 43 44 46 53 54 62 55 56 vr B K k ; 14 L 1 M m N n ; o FF 1A 2A 32| 27 + | a3 % 34 54 1c 2c 8 1B |12 8| c 131 1 01 CR 15 13 35 D 1D 14 |1 1 1 0 SO 16 14 111 1 11 Sl , - ESC &7 39 34 ; 73 59 28 38 u|l < | ] ;g 55 - 56 74 - 3C 29 - 30 36 ) 46 > 62 17 37 57 F 1§ / 47 ? 63 E 1€ 15 3 1/11 | coLumn/row 33 | octa 27 18 2E 2F 1 75 g; % 64 »;j 74 86 5 118 76 67 i 1 9 41 72 115 685 BREOHEEHEERE 10 2 . |ESC| &1 o 114 ji i ) 7 2] 52 ! 19 25 . |0 3l 82 71 »n 9 g 8 161 9 b 42 h 11 w|] 28 |2 70 ‘ 162 56 37 27 160 P 142 45 36 140 H A 1 23 32 |&a] 51 , |s ; 0 | 22 Q@ 121 2 " 23 |1 000 ASCII CHARACTER , 100 ;i fg 12 8 121100 || @ o | | 43 : 32 lo1 01 60 O 41 3‘;’ 7 1M1 2] 20 1}: 2 6 (0110 0 1 p 1 ’ D 40 122 01 11 SP : o1t 0 1 0 20 7 1 o] 3 oo 1 1 o 1 0 1 T dleree 5 0 6 1 77 ad ’ ~ 3€ 77 3F . o 111 6F }gg HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES FROM ASCHI § DECIMAL HEX BAEA - FAZID Figure A-12 ISO Norwegian/Danish Character Set 175 87 86 0 BITS 84 B3 B2 B1 [ROW , 0 0 BS 0 COLUMN 0 1 ““L 00 0 00 1]1 1 21 " 42 18 12 23 P, 3 gfi%m 18 # 4 20 5 13 24 14 % 2 5 % 15 m : : 23 s |[CANI 8 15! ro1o0ln] i 12 ' Y ' 17 | 30 ( 2 ) 32 * 8 1 9 9 9 | 8U |wA suB 1A2 13 | EeC | B voraln ] VT |0 ESC| )| B8 18 FF | 1 12 j 2] 28 c ic C#?fl 15 13 s 11 1 014 @O 16 36 111 118 $' 11001 |13 ASCH CHARACTER ‘ : o m: ' w| D 1D c 42 (103 6 7 67 26 39 50 + | &] . 54 44 < 28 29 a2 2A 28 2¢ = | 86 56 1F 81 « 32 63 66 % 46 53 F B 102 - 53 : / 1E 3 50 | S 52 37 E 62 41 37 @ 17 Q 665 e 41 " 15 2 51 30 w1 N 8 14 A 49 |&u]| ’ 61 b 27 | 1 52 47 7 P , 38 |10 | eaN 64 40 4 ? : @ 36 24 45 & BEL 7 1 1 33 64 34 65 35 54 36 56 37 70 E 66 R 67 ¢ S 68 T 43 104 adl | | 105 69 45 F 106 G 107 70 46 n 47 110 120 80 50 A 81 51 122 w 9 147 103 w 167 150 . 86 a7 57 130 Y 131 i 151 ; b 152 58 89 59 5| & 74 60 L | 76 G || 5A ¢ 46 > 62 N 57 ? 77 o 17 oF 3F ] 4F 68 6C 78 121 79 |2 7A 173 |12 78 174 124 7C| TM 155 94 n 156 110 137 © 157 177 BF 7F SE - T 154 we| 50 4E |we|l 6A 1 A | 138 77 170) 172 - 69 134 92 6 | =] 18 171 5 1nef 118 ¥ 68 |ws| || 5C 17 |1 K 138 116 X ol 58 , 63 ; |0 115 73 164 76 183f M| 3E 66 67 114 % 102 b %6 al 63 144 |&] |a| 2 62 [43] 65 56 K| 78 74 165 127 ol 4D t v j 3 3D 100 |68 = |s]| 72 |63 y 7% 2D 98 g 71 |146] - 4C 162 § 55 € 118 r 13 126 113 ac 98 , 101 9 | 4Aa| 4B 142 85 u 3A K 161 u 132 73 9 61 64 |14 112 se] | e |n| 49 141 d , 72 11270 84 54 126 1 39 P 83 53 124 71 48 a 160 w| 80 o 52 23] X 111 140 b H|72] g1 . 82 | 38 1 7 , 48 30 3 23 44 § 27 “me 1 1 o 1 100 35 22 HT 10 0}12 2 43 8 16 § 34 | 7 6 60 o 21 % 100 1]®9 Tt 41 22 6 011 0]8 10008 32 2 5 =1 20 33 4 5 010 1}5 SP ‘ ! 3 4 01004 1610 i1 LA 0 4 40 ixony | 17 2 3 oo 1 1|3 | 1 2 1 2 20 1 o0 1 0}2 0 1 s 0 0 0000 o1 1 1]7 0 0 | 5F e 60 § BE 111 DEL 175 | 70 176 126 7E 127 1/11 § COLUMN/ROW 33 | ocraL 27 | DECIMAL 18 § HEX Figure A-13 Portuguese Character Set L7 ¥ COLUMN - 44 Tk « BITS ROW | 64 B3 g A + & o E ] ‘ ] 0 10 2 0010 ¥ | W 44 2 &6 i 3 33 2 30 g«j 62 k! 53 3 81 33 4 & 6 o 110 | [} 142 o8 62 d 144 fe % 164 118 u 165 17 54 o9 63 46 e |2 6 B¢ 543% F 106 126 8656 t 7 47 39 7 67 54 G 127 9 50 8 70 ] H 71 57 1 a2 v I 43 3 58 K LF | ¢ 2% % A 1A " ESC 827 VT 13 , 14 } m B 34 12 40 28 51 41 29 * 53 28 54 2 » 44 3% - 55 0 TR 80 14 10 6 0 1w 2 CR | 1§ T2 a7y F ¥ S| : wl , ascii cuaracTer| ggE | 71 | COtUMWROW 33 §ocra 9 9 24 15 ¢ 38 * 4 0 s 20 6 L 57] lal 2% In ' * < 38 T s L 75 M ] £ % 82 > ? 60 3 = 45 i8] | el 3F 0 46 v W07 w 85 a7 163 s 11573 &4 &6 ( 72 124 1 B4 € 6 TR 114 ‘r fi n T 162 r 123 83 53 143 0 113 , s o e 145 19 : b 85 88 CAN 2418 i 161 125 9 1311 001 52 q a7 69 u E 106 9 : B2 1417 5 . 3 FF &: 127 160 |2 60 a | P 64 11 12111 0 0 104 68 & 1 wl : |1 HT 0 &743 R Y21 140 5 10 0 0 : @1 1703 c 50 o k1 2% 8 e 86 . 7 ¥ 45 o111 {BEL | BS Q 41 64 62 M o 102 B 120 P | a0 65 1 ¥ sa| a0 A 6 i § 7 , 100 |4 61 0 0 MR 1 17 L ¥ 60 | 41 21 20 o 1 0 33 5 5 4 1 SP | n| 3 & o1 0 w1100 mm} 1 0 2 # 4 ‘ Ipc opn 3 i} 2 oY 00 : ) 1 3 o6t o1 14 1 1 10 G T 1 1 0] 0.0 0 18 Bt a 2 1] [ Tt 111 01 1 - 0 8281 ] as 101010 T 86 1 ] loooo | NULL, 9 ki 0 o 4 E 87 &5 74 7% 146 v | 186 147 W |e 102 66 wal (3117 | 187 , N O | HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES | FROM ASCHH 1 27 § DECIMAL 18 § HEX 2 B Figure A-14 Spanish Character Set * P i TIRTL COLUMN O BITS gg ) 1 0 O ROW | B4 B3 B2 B1 | g5 0 joooo | NUL| 1 0 0 0 1 2 oo 2 0 0 0 1 10 6y SPp | ® 1 21 41 1 001 | (XOND 58 |01 o1 1 0 7 01 8 (1000 | BS 9 1001 10 1 |10 1 1111 01 18 12 N ] HT 23 44 25 21 6 26 16 23 17 BE |8 |CAN| 8 31 x| 12 32 |SUB | A 1A REEE | ESC | = 14 34 B 281 C SO | 14 161 1 1 1 S 35 0] D 36 | € 37 31 1/11 26 a7 39 51 | “ < 52 34 65 [T 35 q ® 66 54 36 67 55 € 29 52 2A 28 54 “l 2C ) 2€ 57 57 39 72 58 3A » 59 103 A 7] v B 74 |eo| ac 75 61 D < é 76 62] 3E 77 63 N 68 44 105 K ol a5 106 y: 3 70 a6 107 c 71 E | 1o | 2| = O 48 ' E | 8] 49 12 74 T aA 'E“ I “f T ¥ 3F ég 50 121 ‘ 81 si| 82| 123 |- 83 0 6 e 124 84 54 - 125 85 55 126 6| 56 127 87 @ |8] 58 u - ol 59 132 wl 5A Y ®l U 7l v 4B ac ‘ 115 4D 116 8] 4E 17 79 4F @ € B 140 96 Y :?g 141 ~— 16 n 1 o | 14 60 97 61 70 142 @ = a 162 98 72 143 99 163 o 115 o o :?; 74 63 a 2 & 144 100 64 145 \ 101 65 @@ 146 ¢ 103 |12 66 147 73 165 = 17 o 75 G u?: 1 76 o8 167 119 67 & 150 | 68 77 170 g |12 78 151 @ e = e |10s] 69 152 106 6A ! 7:13 62 131 O 133 9} 114 ” 57 13 u 113 -1 a 53 fi 1 E 1 1 1 52 a7 - 1 122 6 43 104 " 73 0 47 38 - wl %] 66 7 1 55 56 |s6 e ‘ 42 33 64 70 28 ‘A 63 3 37 | & a| < 102 so | 27 [a0] A 62 50 2F ‘ ESC 38 a3 < 1F ASCII CHARACTER] 46 « € 1E 17 1F5 | 258 42 € 1D 16 45 a ¢ 1c 15 | 65 32 53 18 |12 36 24 40 101 - 3 2 51 ® 19 13 |1 141 110] X 18 1" CR | 3 § 2| | ¢ 13|11 01 Y 27 7 VT ¥ 22 10 1 € 15 7 LF | 0o FF 35’ 13 5 49 + 64 ' i 0 1 100 fi; 61 43 24 0 121100 34 3 5 48 30 2 £ 20 14 © 7 i ° 0 60 42 ¢ 4 6 BEL | 21 EE 4 4 6 1 13 22 5 6 i g, 2 3 | DC3 o | 0 1 ]2 17 2 3 3|00 1 1 40 6 ! 1 0 © 4 ? 0 20 2 |01 00 0 0 o 4 3 , 171 o u 153 172 - 122 u 7A ‘@ 153 w7 o 173 123 13; h ;g:a H :;: ‘ 7C ‘ 3] 7 1% tH 11;2 ¢ ;;g 58 5C 135 50 136 gal 5E 137 o) 5F ! ] 6C 15 60] 156 4 | no] ' of 6E 167 Y 78 y 0 13 9?1 DEL 6F 1 1;; 7F SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHIC SET § COLUMN/ROW 33 ] ocTAL 27 | becimaL 18 | HEX M- 10,087 Figure A-15 DEC Supplemental Character Set 178 APPENDIX A Mo - COLUMN - 0 | BITS 20 0 10 E , ] 0000 1 |0 001 2 oot 3 /0011 ‘ S B , | a&, SP 2 17 ! 2 22 18 12 m‘;'% 19 |o100 4 24 & o1 01 55 6 B 6 101 1 3 , ' | 2 2% a7 25 ) % : ® - 41 9 K2 |82 : 72 2 + | 2] gg 14 34 54 c 1C w] 43 + M 56 k 1F ' / 46 26 57 47 2F > ? 83 ¢ 143 53 124 v 126 66 w [7Z Je] 162 114 oo| 63 | 144 72 S ‘ 115 163 73 164 t 101 u f 148 102 v 166 118 g | w |[¥® 64 |145] 65 87 57 130 ' 100 55 5% r 62 @ 54 1250 98 66 150 o] 74 | 65 117 75 103 67 D 116 76 119 77 170) X | _ 36 1E F K = 37 15 59 si| |08 70 4 || 142 &85 Y ] 20 u 45 b d 1 74 3c 68 44 105 n 82 84 ' 29 2c T X b 30 E | 68 ol 39 1] 43 104 161 52 110 67 , 67 H € | ] 1D 17 ! 66 71 47 |a]l EIEN 14 w 8 =] G 55 a7_ lsuB | 32| 19 % 67 7 30 27 51 | 16 3 ’ 46 38 50 D 123 34 | 66 ( 13 s 41 42 r 27 24 a5 18 15 103 51 63 F $ B CR 3 66 54 VT | 5 ESC 27 13 ¢ 32 35 ¢ |eEscl 122 6 301 9 R & 23 17 N w02 2 2 ] Si 44 B E 12 | 181 111 ¢ 62 50 53 35 : ' 43 Q 5 3l SO # 13 65 % 1on 25 1 FF | 2 34 112 o 101 , 21 15 | 121100 |1 101 42 160 P A D CAN 4 ; " 7 1 49 61 31 52 16 |3 1 | 40 30 4 - v 41 6 o i 3% 10 HT 33 , | 14 % 7 7 O 21 5 1 , 20 4 64 20 67 1 BEL!| : |1000|BS 1 00 1 13 4 "5 40 2 23| 4 D o111 1 al ° 0 | || 1" 2 , 1411 110 | 1 o 1|1 011 —— 1 wre w| 3 g , 0 -2 e — NuL 1 T3 7 - agtgs 3 °, | O 4 iy 2 0 i iy 4 , 5 —-— 1 ° ROW | B4 B3 B2 B1 | s 0 — o |80 L) 30 7 62 3E 77 63 3F N o KEY ascii cHARACTER] ESC | /' | cOLUMVROW 33 | ocTaL 27 1B HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES FROM ASCI DECIMAL § HEX ‘ WH-TRZIB Figure A-16 Swedish Character Set APPENDIX A 179 e a7 BE 0 O BS BITS 0 0 0 1 1 ag 0 1 | 0 0ooo0o0]o0 NUL | 0 0o 00 1)1 T 001 042 2 20 | w|10 1D 1 %%T 21 p SP 40 || 20 O 41 ‘ ! 23 22 1812 TM) 42 3 &efi% 19| u 4 24 22 3 ‘ 3 11 23 . 13 27 23 20 $ 010 1]5 5 25 5 6 21 6 15 26 % 45 6 22 16 & 7 27 ’ 10 30 01101}6e 7 1 000]|8 Bfi'— BS 7 23 7 17 8 CAN |, 31 9 19 8 18 10019 HT 11 1o10fw] YF 12 voraln ] VT T Y0 012 FF tror R I || o] SO O sl |, 1 1 1 A 9 o 122 142 r 162 1wl o 163 R 103 € | o 68 T 124 126 5 53 E 69 U 38 6 54 F 70 v 2% 46 % 47 39 50 40 28 " 7 8 8 | 66 36 87 55 37 0 G | H 7 S a8 44 45 106 46 107 71 47 110 || 48 w X 100 t 85 145 101 u 165 86 f 65 ue| 75 y | 166 56 126 56 127 87 57 130 88 58 a2 . 72 ss]l 7| 9 | 112 €‘ | 132| 53 . 73 113) 133 28 L 44 15 36 - 56 ic | 1D 16 36 E 1E + 37 / 1F 28 54 2¢ s| 20 o] a1 a3 56 ’ < = |w| 2 57 47 ? 2E 2F 44 o] K| 74 60 L‘ 38 ac 75 || D 76 M| || N 77 63 0 3E F 8 114 ¢ 76 ac 115 9 103 67 76 167 w 119 7_11 170 X ws] Y 171 |1e]l T 172 | 173 68 J 68 152 BA, 163 134] 92 1 135 118 161 K |o 5C 74 17 66 147 ol 58 116 h | ] gof 50 102 150 131 1 7Y 5| 4B 73 e | 52 3a 63 64 6B 154 108 6C 166 120 78 121 79 |12 7A B | 123 174 124 bl 7C 175 & | s3] M | 0 u | > 116 136 156 176 5D | T 76 *a 4E 17 4F 6D TM o] 95 0 167 11 DEL 177 | 6F 7F 137 5F 6E g 70 sl SE P 78 5] 4D i 115 d 54 % - 49 7 114 72 84 32 Y 113 164 1 73 |2 70 144 57 28, YT 1 53 9 9 ] 62 g3l a3l ‘ b 123 37 34 65 82 52 60 | 106 34 F 81 D 14 15 a7| 52 12 17 Cle&l| S 23 81 161 51 4 24 + | |5 63 66 42 Q 141 a1 18 D B 160 121 6 ESC| ;| u] 50 32 1021 62 7 P ) 33 ¢ 85 & 140 || 104 | |0 B A 101 ool 50 25 1A ‘ 61 4 P 120 B1 ‘ |0 Sus | 3 13 8 | e 40 84 27 ( ‘ 100 a8 3 3 5 LI B 1 30 49 |3 43 4 14 1 Z 01 00/|a 4 60 34 2 44 v 1 0 17 1 001 1|3 [ I B RO 1 0 COLUMN B4 B3 B2 B1]|ROW ' 0 0 G |2 i 7€ 127 i v ‘k BSCH CHARACTER Es‘: /11 COLUMN/ROW 33 | ocTaL 27| pECIMAL 18 HE X WA Figure A-17 Swiss Character Set 7T S g 180 APPENDIX A i “m” I ] BITS | - ° - 0 GL|GR 2 |10 o GL|GR 3N ) 60| } ooo |1 41 1 BEIE 26 B w | | ' |\ . = 4 e 04 |304 A T fi , v | ] ' ~ . , @ Tt an _£8 Egi = |88 u:z 2:: T 145 | 345 9|55 ‘;: 2:: 165 | 365| |aim |u) {141 146 | 346 166 | 366 147 | 347 67| 367 HIHEEE Y e w el = , T n l i | 50 | 350 wa z:: 11.31 L E 31 ‘ VIO 30 133 248 71 374 Y | rv2v] 249 :: C 69 | Eg 157 | 382 w2 N A | oe] 115 | 315 ‘A “:‘7* m w1 317 il ARSI CHARACTER | *NOTE: WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR, 81T 8815 1 Figure A-18 DEC Technical Character Set 153 | 353 | 154 | 354 zs] 6c | EC 158 | 3586 109 U Y 1 zg 19| r9 72| 372 ol 4 ) Tl B f 7 wgm. z:w 156 | 356 ” | 3 | F8 3% | 105 | 233] 2 ac | cc Fi LANE |ag 16| 318 — n a 14 | 3t4 ' 13 | 241 [ -: LEGEND " 164 | 364 L1 9 | co 1z | an2 F TTHRE"TM A - 00| 0| 163 | 363 X _fi ‘b 112 | 240 w1 | M 1643 | 343 61 e 3 :g ’ 160 | 360 162 | 362 R ||=] & Wy | 142 | 342 6 i U O | s | 228 ?..L... IR X €0 8 07 | 307 i |24} 1 GL |GR 7 |15 122 106 | 306 113 | 313 A ' o . *g: 14 " @ 118 141 1 X 1 121 |e|m H I B tre WY -1 |9% 05 |305 Ao 1100 C1 103 |303 S 1001 1010 |mw| 41 102 | 02 140 | 340 80 50 v, o GL |GR |6 |14 AHEEREHERRH S LA — ) 1000 e , / ' ' . v, 5 120 n 1o B2 ' 0100 64 o .7?.:....... 1 4 100 e e 1 » Y ° s | 17| < ; » 1 187| 357 i »Tz: ’:23 173 | 373 174 | 374 T | 12 2 - 375 7] FC 175 175 '33 FO| 176 | 376 COLUMN 10 |1 © % o 111| BEL -4 7 wmw s wwwiloooiooos s wwinun ===l000l® BITS | ROW| B4 83 B2 B1 01 0 I'n 1§ Y'Y 1 1mlro 1211 100 ‘ 1301101 f 14 1TM 13 FF 12 ~1®' Mtttt},sp 4 181111 15 3' F ASCII CHARACTER COLUMN/ROW OCTAL | HIGHLIGHTS DIFFERENCES | FROM ASCIl DECIMAL HEX B Figure A-19 VT100 Line Drawing Character Set 182 APPENDIX A T AABC Ba . fl?” . BITS coooflg| | 12 SP 1]9% i 0 nlwe] LAS * LY ¢ oot 1|3 o1 oo £ 4 ) XC o1 01({8) o1 o1 10| ¥ ‘ 8 10019 3 44 | 244 ’ 23| a3 | 3%]|we 24 | a4 45 | 248 |a|ws| 2 | As 3 s © |we] 47 | 247 3 | w7 |18 L 3 141 |341 @ 9 | 28] %2 -~ 102 2 ~ ) i 142 A 66 | 194 O 82 lzwo] @ 8 | 28| P 123 | 33 - 143 | M43} 53| 03 63 | ~ 124 | 324 144 | 344 2|| 283 e 63 |5 | | 3| 83 64 | 264 52 | w0l &5 A | 103 @ || 303 285 [s2]wm] 35 | 885 66 | 208 |so | w2} % | es 67 | 267 55 | 183 .e A A SE G &7 |19s| 43 | c3 104 | 304 8 || 105 5 e 6o 0 § g § Ba |m| |22} @& . [12 | 3% X 127 |937 g7 |28 (198} 107 | 307 "ol 108 @ 34 | 04 |w| 46 1 C8 @ 126 | 35 (306 5 1 65 06 52 |oz |8 || & 55 | DS O 86 (24| @@ 5% | De ¢ & |€2 | || |wo |2 145 s o |t ¢ | E¢ [ |2] 146 | 346 |02 2| s 52 | 262 [e2|m] A | AA 53 | 283 m 28 | AB s} € | AC 55 | 256 | as|m| 20| AD 266 %| ae 57| 27 a7l s i2 & 1 © » Y ¥ E . E »72 |ss E 73 . 3A 59 e 2 @ U 131 | 33 8 217 12 | 312 ~ 132 | 332 | cs © | co A A | Ca nsfanf % | 208 48 | cp 7 - N 75 | & _ 1 ns | 3s| 78] 60 X 0 %| Y | e ¢ o] TR EL 73 | 200 3 | n 63 3F 1 1 e 1 40, co 316 o & o @ @4 28] § |ws| | G EXES] R TR ] A 91 | 219 @ 8 | o8 R ES BN 92|{20| €1 0¢ 13| 3%| Q| 0| oo B | wiaz| 19| 207 B CF 9 | 223) afi sEREI |e 6A | EA 107 | 235 68 | €8 154 | 354 e | 28] sc| EC s0l ko 7 € |p 137 | 337 &F 68 | €8 _ | 166 388 | AR 136 | 336 wios| 4F 5 |10¢|2]| o | G 151 | 381 |w0s|23] 5A | DA E €| ce THEL g 59 | o U Yy |26] 58 | oe T 6 | 204 A | cc 116 8 & |20] 8 |E6 8| 88 N 57 g 147 | 347 03 | | 2 | as 56 | 184 161 | 381 n €3 67 | &7 51 | 261 | 4w , |15 160 | 360 |n2]|200 0 | ro] 42 150 | 350 |aw|we] 7 3 61| €1 | o7 56| - |208f A 57 o0|14] ® | w|m| 11 i 8 130 | 30 54 | 254 ; 21 a1 | ¢1 - 1t _ ' GL |GR (14 1o | 3 |9 |24] 60| €0 1o | 310 431 1101 |13] = € 6 m & w0 | 20 « TV ° N 301 a1} |13 120 |so |28 50 | DO » | w t 110042 W 65 | 193 GL [GR 50 | 178 M | 84 @ P A % 0 27 | a7 A 111 ‘ {J 1 80 | 250 ro1o0f{q0] oty 62 2 | ®|w)] % | A8 ] 1000|881 243 || 243 a2 a6 | 248 | 1|7 34 | 162 a9 | nis 4% | 42 0|2 81 5 w2l <o ' ! 1 GL |GR COLUMN ROW o011 o | 8483 8281) oo0o0 ® ' 85 156 | 356 |vo|ae] 6| e w7 |®7) 11| 238 6F 114 D u 8 378 4 | 282 |_FC. 375 EBEIES 10} Fo 176 | 376 P | %] | s . | 1I7| 397 126| 28 AN L% o Figure A-20 ISO Supplemental Character Set APPENDIX A 183 iy y . Wi b s 3 APPENDIX AJ DEC GRAPHIC MODE — IMAGE EXAMPLES Table B-1 and examples below show different image scales and aspect ratios - you can use with the LA7S. Table B-1 Selectable Image Scale Sizes and Aspect Ratios Image Aspect Ratio Horizontal Grid Size Vertical Grid Size 0.5 % 1:1 1/144-inch 1/144-inch 2:1 1/144 1/72 1:1 1/72 1/72 2.5:1 1/90 1/36 2:1 1:1 1/72 1/36 1/36 1/36 2% . | Scale Size 185 Horizontal Grid Size: Pixel Aspect Ratlio: 1/144 1inch l to 1 Vertical Grid Size: Vertical Sixel Size: Image Scale Size: 1/144 inch 1724 0.5X inch Scale Horizontal Grid Size: 17180 inch Pixel Aspect Vertical Vertical Ratlio: Grid Size: Sixel Size: inch 1712 inch Full Scale o Image Scale Size: 1/72 Horizontal Pixel Grid Size: Aspect Ratio: Vertical Grid Size: Vertical Sixel Image Size: Scale Size: 1/144 2 to inch 1 1/72 1/12 inch inch Full Scale MA-0286-88 Example 1 186 APPENDIX B Horizontal Grid Size: Pixel Aspect Ratio: 1/72 1 to 1inch 1 Vertical Grid Size: Vertical Sixel Size: Image Scale Size: 1/72 1712 Full inch inch Scale s petll B Sy R W s, - - g ..""'m Mwwwfl.w s i R i A - P g T = P o Horizontal Grid Sigze: Pixel Aspect Ratlio: 1/90 inch 2.5 to 1 Vertical Grid Size: Vertical Sixel Size: Image Scale Size: 1/36 inch 1/6 2X inch Scale » " MA.-G285-86 Example 2 APPENDIX B 187 Horizontal Pixel Grid Aspect Vertical Grid Vertical Sixel Image Scale Size: Ratio: Size: Size: Size: 1/36 inch 1l 1 to 1/36 inch 1/6 1inch 2X Scale .umwm" 'w‘*nc""m /!‘ i 4 ¢ I" d ¢ -'M‘ e, .‘”*H‘"‘ “m_wu -‘“. ® n". -,..w‘ "m.' ", ""‘-| L Yi ] 1 i ] i L N, ., & «"” k) m'wl““ - .“'u e ”‘“‘.‘ lln”‘”'“‘ .“”u“‘””“ iy, — —— P M A-0288-86 Example 3 Horizontal Pixel Grid Aspect Vertical Grid Vertical Sixel Image Scale Size: Ratio: Size: Size: Size: 1/72 inch 2 1l to 1/36 1inch 1/6 1inch 2X Scale A Sl ] MA-0289-86 Example 4 188 APPENDIX B TEXT MODE Following are some generic examples of programming that can illustrate LA75 programming technique. Refer to the software/operating instructions of your computer to properly send the applicable escape sequences. 189 A 10 '--- Horizontal Pitch Changes --- 20 30 ESC$= CHRS$(27) — 50 '---Default 60 ) (80) 70 LPRINT ESC$; "[Ow”; 80 LPRINT “"This line 90 LPRINT " 100 LPRINT "characters." 110 LPRINT 120 LPRINT column column width, 10 cpi --- o printed width of at default 10 cpi horizontal pitch. Maximum"; 80" : B / 130 140 '--- Expanded (132) column width, 16.5 cpl --~ 150 160 LPRINT ESC$; "[4w"; 170 LPRINT “This line 180 LPRINT " column width 190 LPRINT displayed" " 200 LPRINT 210 LPRINT This line printed "on a print printed at at allovs compressed pitch of more up 132 data, to 16.5 cpi. The characters, expanded"; to be": . line.* default 10 cpi horizontal pitch. Maximum column width of 80 characters. This line printed at compressed pitch of 16.5 cpl. The expanded coluan vidth allows more data, up to 132 characters, to be displayed on a print line. MA.0279-86 Example 1 — Horizontal Pitch i i 190 APPENDIX C ‘~--- Draft, LQ, NLQ Modes Memo, --- 30 ESCs$= CHR$(27) 40 DOUBQUOTE$= CHRS$(34) --- ‘--- Select draft density LPRINT ESC$; "[1"; LPRINT "This DOUBQUOTES; line printed "z"; in draft density." LPRINT ‘'--- Select LQ LPRINT ESC$; LPRINT "This LPRINT '--- Select density --- "[2"; DOUBQUOTES:; "z"; line printed in LO density."” | Memo density --- L] 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 LPRINT ESC$; "([3"; LPRINT LPRINT line '--- “This Select NLQ LPRINT ESC$:; LPRINT "This DOUBQUOTES; printed density "=z"; in Memo density." --- "[4":; DOUBQUOTES$; “z"; line printed in NLQ density." LPRINT This line primted in draft This line printed in LQ This line printed in Memo density. This line printed in NLQ density. density. density. Ma .0278-86 Example 2 — Print Quality Selection b 10 '--- DEC Technical Set Composites --- 20 30 ESC$= CHRS$(27) 40 50 '--- 60 ' Load 70 LPRINT 80 LPRINT 90 LPRINT Technical "Construction ESC$; 100 LPRINT " 110 LPRINT ESC$; of and construct mathematical mathematical signs with signs DEC --- Technical Set" “K*; x=10"; “"L" 120 LPRINT ESC$; 130 LPRINT " 1885° 140 LPRINT * ", 150 LPRINT ESCs$; 160 LPRINT " 170 LPRINT ESC$; 180 LPRINT "(>"; “(B"; x"; ESC$; 190 LPRINT 200 210 220 230 LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT ESC$; " (B"; * 2x" ESCg; "“(>"; * 246" 7 4" ; "2"; ESC$; signs with “K"; " + 1" BRBREM” 240 LPRINT ESC§; "(B"; 250 LPRINT " ) 260 LPRINT of "L"; "(>"; * * Construction Set mathematical DEC Technical Set X=10 — > X 2 + 1 2x A 1 MA - 028086 i Example 3 — Using Digital Technical Character Set 192 APPENDIX C Wm ! - 10 '--- Form Length --- 60 '--- Change form length to 10 lines {(110/66 in. at default vert. pitch) --- 80 LPRINT 100 110 FOR ' 20 30 ESC$= CHR$(27) ;g E?@a CHR$(12) 70 90 iy a 120 ESC$; "[lOt"; LPRINT “Form length set to 10 lines: TOP OF FORM - Line 1"; NEXT X=1 TO LPRINT X 130 LPRINT " 140 LPRINT & Line 6" ~ FF$; next page: TOP OF FORM - Line 11"; 150 LPRINT " 160 Form LPRINT length set to 10 lines: next page: TOP OF FORM - TOP OF FORM - Line 1 Line © Line 11 MA-0282-86 - Example 4 — Form Length Selection 10 '~~~ 20 ' 30 ESC$= Shadow Bold, Underline, and Double Underline SGR Parameters --- CHR$(27) 40 50 '--- Select shadow bolding 60 70 LPRINT ESC$; 80 LPRINT "For 90 LPRINT ESC$;: 100 LPRINT "shadow 110 LPRINT ESC$; 120 LPRINT " 130 LPRINT is "[Om"; G highlighting text, “; "[1lm"; bolding"; "[Om"; avalilable." 140 150 '--- le0 ' 170 LPRINT Select ESC$; underlining LPRINT "Underlining"; LPRINT ESCs$; 200 LPRINT " 210 LPRINT ESC$; "; "(21lm"; LPRINT "double-underlining”; 230 LPRINT ESCs; 240 LPRINT " 250 LPRINT For highlighting "[Om"TM; provide and --- "[Om"; 220 Underlining double-underlining "[4m"; 180 190 and and tvo text, means shadow of underscoring." bolding double-underlining is available. provide two means of underscortng. MA-0283-86 Example 5 — Text Highlighting 194 APPENDIX C ALTERNATIVE PROGRAMMING METH.DS This appendix describes some operating limitations and alternative program- ming methods that can assure good printing accuracy. D.1 LIMITATION OF THE PARTIAL LINE UP (PLU) COMMAND The PLU+command provides a 1/12 inch reverse line motion. The LA75 sup- ports one PLU command per superscript. Since the LA75’s reverse positioning accuracy cannot be guaranteed whenever two or more PLU commands are is- sued in succession, use only one PLU command to perform superscripting. D.2 PAPER REVERSE LIMITATION WHEN BOTTOM FEEDING PAPER Due to mechanical limitations when feeding paper from the bottom of the printer. the LA75 cannot accurately perform reverse paper motions. Therefore. when paper is bottom-fed, the LA75 does not support the Partial Line Up (PLU) command (Section 4.4.4) because it results in vertical misregistration. Alternative: When using bottom paper feed, do not use the PLU and PLD vertical mo- - tion commands to achieve superscripting and subscripting. Instead. use the superscripting and subscripting functions described in Sections 4.4.7.2 and 8.8.5 of this manual. D.3 AVOID "MULTI-PASS PRINTING” TO ASSURE GOOD PRINT ACCURACY Multi-pass printing occurs when software attempts to send more than one line of data for the same print line. Under certain situations described below the LA75 will try to "reverse paper for line readjustment.” This reverse motion is actually a small reverse and forward motion which adjusts the paper back to the original print line. Avoid the following three situations: ¢ use of overstrike for bolding at high print densities * use of the underline character at high print densities e sending composite characters separate from text characters Recommended alternative programming methods are identified for each situation, NOTE: When using paper rear feed. you may use the following methods as the alternatives that assure good print accuracy. When using bottom feed. you MUST use these methods because the LA75 is not able to reverse paper. D.3.1 Bolding by Overstriking Do not use character overstrike (sending the same data to the printer twice) as a method of bolding in NLQ or LQ density. These high print densities require two-pass printing with a half-dot forward offset between passes. Therefore, overstriking in these densities will require "reversing paper for line re- adjustment” which may result in reduced print quality. Alternative: To avoid this. use the LA75 bolding function. (Refer to Sections 4.4.7 and 8.8.4 of this manual.) This function will provide good print accuracy while increasing print throughput as compared with the bolding by overstriking. D.3.2 Underlining Text with Underline Character Do not use the Underline character to underline the text in NLQ and LQ den- sities. These high print densities require two-pass printing with a half-dot for- ward offset between passes. When the text is underlined using the underline character, the printer must “reverse paper for line readjustment” which may result in reduced print quality. 196 APPENDIX D Alternative: To avoid this, use the LA75 underlining function. (Refer to Sections 4.4.7 and 8.8.6.6 of this manual.) This function will provide good print accuracy while increasing print throughput as compared with underlining the text with the underline character. D.3.3 Printing "Full-Height” Composite Characters from VT100 Special Graphic Character Set, DEC Technical Character Set, and IBM Graphic Character Set Full-height composite characters are characters such as the vertical bar | (7/8) of the VT'100 Special Graphic Set which extend vertically to connect to adja- cent composite characters. In all print densities, when using the LA75’s "full-height” composite charac- ters, software may choose to send the composite characters and the normal text characters in separate lines of data intended for the same print line. If the composite characters are sent before the last line of data. the printer will need to “reverse paper for line readjustment” which may result in reduced print quality. Alternative: To avoid this, send the composite characters to the printer in a "single” line of data along with normal text or during the last line of data intended for the same print line. In addition. to assure good horizontal, line-to-line registration when printing the LA75's composite characters, use the unidirectional printing. Refer to Sections 4.5.7 and 8.6.2 of this manual for the unidirectional printing setup in DEC and IBM Emulation modes. APPENDIX D 197 i T i s s g o S, S - - INDEXES There are four indexes. 1 General/DEC Mode 2 DEC Mode Printing Commands 3. IBM Emulation Mode 4 IBM Emulation Mode Printing Commands INDEXES 199 GENERAL/DEC MODE CA - Active column, 45. 46, 49. 50 selecting. 45. 82. 92, 93 moving forward. 93 moving backward. 93 Active line, 46, 49 selecting. 46, 69, 92, 93 moving forward, 46, 69, 87, 93 Active position, 49, 82, 84, 93, 94 ANSI announcer sequence, 75 ANSI coding standard. 37 Application Program Command (APC), 48, 55, 57 Aspect ratio, 123 See also Pixel aspect ratio Automatic carriage return. 29. 32, 47, 93 Automatic line feed. 29. 31. 94 Automatic sheet feeder control functions. 80 control sequence (DECASF). 80 errors. 81 Autowrap command (DECAWM), 93 feature. 29, 31. 82, 85. 93 -B- Backspace (BS) character. 45 Baud rate, 15, 18 selection, 26, 28 Bell (BEL) character. 45 Binary bit pattern, 115 Binary to sixel data conversion. 96. 97, 115, 120 Bold printing, 78. 196 Bottom paper feeding limitations. 195. 196 200 INDEXES i Cancel (CAN) character. 45, 47. 56. 57. 126 Carriage return (CR) character. 45, 46, 93 Character. composite, 197 control. See control characters. error. 19, 50 final. 52, 54 intermediate, 52, 54 parameter. 53 printable, 38, 42, 49, 121 space, 49, 58, 126 Character cell, 50 Character coding 7-bit code table explained. 38 8-bit code table explained. 38 Character set, designing, 96 ASCII (7-bit), 38, 39, 72, 164 DEC Multinational. 38, 40, 72 ISO Multinational (Latin-1), 38, 41, 72 size, 38, 101 User-defined. 96 User-preference supplemental, 75 Character sets. 163 active. 74 assigning. 72 built-in, 163 designating. 40. 73 fallback, 73 invoking (mapping). 42, 74 printable, 38 selecting, 71. 72. 74 Character width. 66, 67 Characters per inch. See Horizontal pitch Characters per line. See Vertical pitch Clear tabs. horizontal, 86, 87 vertical. 91, 92 Commands. See the specific command or the Index of Printing Commands INDEXES 201 Communication, 13 Conformance Levels. introduction, 37 setting, 106 summary, 61, 62 Control characters, 37, 38. 42 ANSI graphic. 120. 126 CO0. 45, 50. 57 Cl1. 48. 55, 56—58 converting 7-bit and 8-bit. 58. 59 equivalent 7-bit and 8-bit. 59 private graphic. 120, 121, 125 receive. 60 transmit. 60 Control panel, 20 Control sequence introducer (CSI). 52. 63 Control sequences, format. 52 Control string. 55, 56 unused, 49. 5656—57 Control switches. print mode. 20. 21—23 set-up mode. 20, 23 Data buffering, 19 Data format. 16 Data interface. 13 connector, 13 signals, 15, 16 Data set ready signal, 15, 16 DC1 (device control 1) character, 45, 47 DC3 (device control 3) character, 45. 47 DEC Mode, 7, 29, 30 text. 8. 51 graphic, 8,115, 116 DEC Protocol features selection. 28, 29. 30 Decipoint, 117 202 INDEXES Default values. 33. 118 DEL (delete) character. 50. 58 Device attribute (DA) command. 107, 108 Device control (DC1, DC3) characters, 45, 47 Device control string (DCS), 55, 75, 98, 116 format. 55 form feed, 87 Device ID, selection, 29, 31 Device status report (DSR), 110 error codes. 111 Device status request (DSR), 109 Dot printing, 96, 115, 120 Double-underlining, 78 Downline-loading fonts, 96, 98, 100 Drawings printing, 115, 185 : DRCS., 96 Error codes device status report. 110 indications, 111 Error handling, 66, 57 Escape (ESC) character, 45, 48, 51. 56, 126 Escape sequences, control characters in, 51, 56 format, 51 FAULT indicator, 20, 21, 22 Feature select, 23. 26 FF (form feed) character, 45, 47 Form feed switch, 20, 22 Form length, 28, 30. 69 maximum, 69 Font buffer, 96, 98 Font cartridge, 9 Font parameter loading, 96, 100 Forward index (IND) character, 48, 49, 92 Front panel controls. See Control panel Graphic carriage return, 120, 121, 125 Graphic character sets. See also Character sets ASCII, 38, 39, 164 DEC Supplemental, 40, 178 ISO Supplemental. 41. 183 selecting, 71, 72 Graphic data. See Picture data Graphic Lett (GL) set. 38, 42, 120. 121 Right (GR) set. 38. 42. 120, 121 Graphic left (GL) and graphic right (GR) tables, 38, 42 Graphic mode, 8, 115, 158 Graphic mode entering, 116 leaving, 126 selecting, 116 Graphic new line. 121, 125 Graphics control characters, 121 control string, 116 final character. 119 grid sizes. 117,118,123, 125 left margin. 125 right margin, 120 printing. 119, 120, 125 protocol selector. 116, 117 “H- Highlighting characters. 77—79 Horizontal grid size, 117, 118 Horizontal pitch (DECSHORP), 64 Horizontal position absolute (HPA), 94 relative (HPR). 94 Horizontal positioning, 81 Horizontal spacing. See Horizontal pitch HT (horizontal tab) character, 45, 46 Horizontal tabs, 85 HTS (horizontal tab set control). 85 204 INDEXES . 1- IBM Emulation mode, 7, 131 sequence. 105 IBM protocol features. 29. 32, 131 selection. 21, 32 Identification product, 107, 108 Image scale size, 117—119. 185 Index characters forward (IND), 48, 49, 92 Input buffer, 18, 19 overflow, 18, 19 Interface. See Data interface Introducer escape sequence, 51 control sequence, 52 string, 55, 98. 116 Invalid parameters, 53. 57 Italics printing, 78 Kill buffer command, 45, 47 setting, 29, 32 Least significant bit, 18. 97, 115 Line feed (LF), 19, 45, 46. 87, 89, 92, 94 Line feed/new line mode (LNM), 93 Line feed switch, 20, 22 Lines per inch. See Vertical pitch Lines per page (DECSLPP) command, 69 LA75 controls and indicators. 20 initial (power-up) operating state, 33 overview, 7. 8 specifications, 9—11 Loading NVR setting (DECFNVR). 112 Loading character sets. 71. 72, 74. 75 font. 96. 101 Locking shift (LS) controls, 71, 79 Macro parameter, 117 Margins bottom. 87—89. 95 graphic left, 125 left, 66. 81, 82, 84, 93 reset by DECSHORP, 66, 85 right, 66, 81, 82, 84, 93, 94, 120 top, 87—89, 95 Mark bit, 16 Most significant bit, 97, 115 -N New line mode. See Line feed/new line mode NEXT command. 23. 26 switch. 20. 23 Next line (NEL) character. 48, 49, 92 Null (NUL) character. 45, 47 .0 - Off-line. 20. 22 On-line. 20. 22 Operating limitations, 195 Operating System Command (OSC), 48, 55, 56 Options, 9 Overline, 79 Overstrike, 196 206 INDEXES Page format, 28. 29, 81, 84. 87 Page length (DECSLPP). 69 Page width. 81 Paper sizes. 11. 69, 70 Parameters ANSI public 51, 52. 77. 78 DEC private. 79 graphic numeric. 125 graphic selective. 117 in control sequences, 53 in control strings, 55 Parity. 16. 18 Partial line down (PLD) command, 71, 89, 195 Partial line up (PLU) command, 71, 89, 195 Pitch. See Horizontal pitch and Vertical pitch Pixel aspect ratio (for graphics), 122, 123. 125 Pixel size, 115, 120, 123 width, 117 Pixels, 97, 115, 120, 123 Positioning. See Horizontal position and Vertical position - POWER indicator, 21, 22 switch, 22 Power requirements, 11 Power-up initial settings, 33 self-test. 34 PREVIOUS command. 23, 26 Print mode controls, 20, 21 graphic, 120, 121. 125, 126 operation, 23 Printable characters text, 49 sixel, 120, 121 Printing direction (DECUPM), 95 Printing area, 81 changing, 81 limits (DECHPWA), 81. 82 Printing conditions. 19 Printing menu selection, 28, 29 quality (density). 29. 31, 76 sequences (DECDEN). 76 speed. 28. 76 switch. 20. 21. 23 Privacy Message Command (PM). 48, 55 Product identification. 107, 108 Programming examples, 189 Protocol switch. 20. 21. 24, 131 XON/XOFF. 18 -R - READY indicator. 20. 22 switch. 20, 22 Rear feed limitations. 196 Receive common signal. 15 Received data 7-bit and 8-bit. 16 selecting a format for. 16 signal, 15 Repeat introducer. 121 Repeat sequence. 121. 126 Reset to initial state (RIS). 112 Resetting the printer. See Reset to initial state (RIS) and soft terminal reset (DECSTR) .S - Select graphic rendition (SGR), 77 highlighting characters with. 77, 78. 196 Selecting character set, 71—75 Self-tests. 34 Send common signal. 15 Send data signal. 15 Sending data. 15 Sequences. See Escape sequences and Control sequences Serial character format. 16 208 INDEXES Set-up features. 23. 26—28 menu. 27 mode, 20, 23. 24 values. 23. 26—28 Sheet feeder. 9. 80 Signal names. See Data interface signals Single-shift controls. 71. 73 Sixel, 96. 97. 115. 120. 122 bit pattern. 102 data loading. 98. 101. 102 Sixel graphics dot patterns used to print. 115 how printer decodes data for. 115 protocol. 116. 119 selecting mode for. 116 | Sixel printable characters. 119, 120 Soft terminal reset (DECSTR). 112 Space character (SP). 49, 58. 126 Space bit. 16 Status reports. 110 String terminator. 48. 49, 56. 57. 101. 103. 116. 119, 126 Subscripting. 79 with PLD. 71. 89. 195 Substitute (SUB) character. 19. 45. 48. 56. 57. 126 Superscripting. 79 with PLU. 69. 71. 89. 195 Tabs. horizontal. 85. 86 vertical. 90. 91 Tab stops. See Tabs Text error handling. 57 Transmitted data. 15. 18 Top of form. 46. 68. 87. 88 .U - Underlining, 78. 196 UPS. 75 User-preference character set, 75 .V - Values. Value select. Vertical pitch (DECVERP), 68, 70, 87. 89 Vertical position absolute (VPA), 95 relative (VPR). 95 Vertical tab (VT), 45, 46, 91 Vertical tabs, 90—92 Vertical tab set control (VTS), 91 X - XON/XOFF protocol, 18, 19 210 INDEXES DEC MODE PRINTING COMMANDS By Mnemonic Name DA (device attribute), 107, 108 DECASFC (sheet feeder control). 80 DECAUPSS (assign upper-preference supplemental character set). 75 DECAWM (autowrap mode). 93 DECCAHT (clear all horizontal tabs), 87 DECCAVT (clear all vertical tabs), 92 DECCRNLM (carriage return/new line mode), 93 DECDEN (print density), 76 DECDLD (downline-loading), 98 DECFNVR (load factory NVR settings), 112 DECHPWA (set page width alignment), 81 DECHTS (horizontal tab set), 86 DECIPEM (IBM emulation mode), 105 DECSCL (set conformance level). 106 DECSHORP (set horizontal pitch). 64 DECSHTS (set horizontal tab stop). 86 DECSLPP (set lines per page). (page length). 69 DECSLRM (set left and right margin). 84 DECSTBM (set top and bottom margin). 88 DECSTR (soft terminal reset), 112 DECSVTS (Set vertical tab stops). 91 DECUPM (set unidirectional/bidirectional painting). 95 DECVERP (set vertical pitch), 68 DECVTS (set vertical tab), 91 DSR (device status report), 110 DSR (device status request), 109 HPA (horizontal position absolute), 94 HPR (horizontal position relative), 94 HTS (horizontal tab set). 48. 85 IND (forward index), 48. 92 LNM (line feed/new line mode), 94 LS (locking shift), 74 INDEXES 211 NEL (next line)., 48. 92 PLD (partial line down). 71 PLU (partial line up). 71 RIS (reset to initial state). 112 SCS (select character set), 71—73 SGR (select graphic rendition), 77. 78 highlighting characters with, 77, 78 SS (single shift). 74 TBC (tabulation clear), 86, 91 VPA (vertical position absolute), 95 VPR (vertical position relative), 95 - VTS (vertical tab set), 48, 91 By Function o Character Sets and Fonts Files Select a character set (SCS). 71 Assign user-preference supplemental character set (DECAUPSS). 75 Font downline-loading (DECDLD). 98 Select highlight printing (SGR). 77. 78 Printer Modes Sheet feeder control (DECASFC). 80 Autowrap (DECAWM), 93 Carriage return/newline (DECCRNLM), 93 Printing density (DECDEN). 76 Line feed/new line (LNM), 94 Unidirectional/bidirectional printing (DECUPM), 95 Page Format Set page width alignment (DECHPWA), 81 Set lines per physical page (DECSLPP), 69 Set top and bottom margins (DECSTBM), 88 Set left and right margins (DECSLRM), 84 212 INDEXES Horizontal and Vertical Spacing Set vertical pitch (DECVERP), 68 Set horizontal pitch (DECSHORP), 64 Active Printing Position Horizontal position absolute (HPA), 94 Horizontal position relative (HPR), 94 Vertical position absolute (VPA), 95 Vertical position relative (VPR), 95 Subscripting/Superscripting/Overline Subscript, 79 with PLD, 71 Superscript, 79 with PLU, 71 Private SGR, 79 Tabs Clear tabs (TBC), 86, 91 Clear all horizontal tabs (DECCAHT), 87 Clear all vertical tabs (DECCAVT), 92 Set horizontal tabs (DECSHTS), 86 Set vertical tab (DECSVT), 91 Set vertical tab stops (DECSVTS), 91 Highlighting Characters Bold printing, 78 Double-underlining. 78 Italics printing, 78 Underlining, 78 Printing Graphs and Drawings Selecting sixel mode, 116. 117 Status Reports Device status report (DSR), 110 Device status request (DSR), 109 Printer ID (DA), 107, 108 INDEXES 213 Resetting the Printer Load factory NVR settings (DECFNVR), 112 Reset to initial state (RIS), 112 Set conformance level (DECSCL), 106 Soft terminal reset (DECSTR), 112 Set/Reset IBM Emulation mode, 105 214 INDEXES IBM EMULATION MODE -A - All Character set, 134. 139 Attribute byte, 162 Automatic line feed, 147, 150 -B - Bell (BEL) character, 141 Bit-image data, 159, 160 Bit-image resolution, 159, 160 Bit-map font data. 162 Bottom margin, 147, 149 BS (backspace) character, 141 Buffer, input, 18 line-oriented, 132, 133 .C- CAN (cancel) character, 144 Carriage return sequence, 151 Character address, 162 bytes, 161 data, 162 size, 133, 134 Character downline-loading, 161 Character sets, 134 charts, 135—140 compatibility, 133 selection, 154 Characters special, 144 Clear downline-load data buffer, 162 Control characters, 141 Co0, 141 Cl1, 141 Control panel, 20 Control switches. ~ print mode, 20. 21—23 Set-up mode. 20. 23 CR (carriage return) character, 142 -D Data bytes. 1568. 159. 161 Data string, 161 Deselect printer. 146 Device control characters DC1, 143 DC2, 143 DC3. 144 DC4. 144 Dot, 159, 160 Downline-loaded character, 161. 162 Downline-load fonts, 155, 161, 162 - sequence, 161 ESC (escape) character, 144 Escape sequences parameters, 134 processing, 139, 145 -F- Feature selection. FF (form feed) character, 142, 147 Font byte pattern, 161. 162 Font data bytes, 161 Font downline-loading, 161. 162 Form length, 147, 149 Graphic data bits. 1569 bytes. 158. 159. 160 excess. 159 Graphic modes. 133. 158 Graphic print speed. 159. 160 216 INDEXES Horizontal pitch. Horizontal tabs. 152 HT (horizontal tab) character. 141 IBM Protocol. 7. 131 selection sequence, 105, 146 selection switch, 20, 21, 32 IBM terminal reset. 146 Initial settings, 131 -L - Line buffer, 132, 134 LF (line feed) character, 142, 147 Line feed, 142 Line terminator, 132 List terminator, 141 NUL (null) character. 141 .0 - Overscore, 157 Paper-out detector. 154 Paper-fault, 154, 155 Printing Compressed, 133, 158. 160 Double-width, 133. 151, 158. 160 Draft, 155 Letter quality. 165, 157, 160 Near letter quality, 155, 157, 160 Shadow bold, 155, 156. 158, 160 Single-width. 134, 151 Standard. 133 Print quality, 133. 1565, 157 Select. 157 Printing direction, 153 Printing rules and hints, 158 Print width, 151 Reset to initial state (RIS)., 146 .S - Sending graphic data, 159 Set-up menu Feature settings, 131 Values, 131 Shadow bolding, Shift in (SI) character, 143 Shift out (SO) character, 143 Soft terminal reset (STS), 146 SP (space), 144, 162 Special characters. 144 Superscript/subscript, 156, 1568 Terminal management commands, 145 Top of form. 142. 147, 150 .U - Underlining. 157 Vertical form handling, 147 Vertical pitch selection, 147, 148 Vertical tabs, 152 VT (vertical tab) character, 142, 147 218 INDEXES IBM EMULATION MODE PRINTING COMMANDS By Function Horizontal and Vertical Spacing Set double-width characters (EREDW), 151 Set single-width characters (ERDDW), 151 Set vertical pitch, 147, 148 Set horizontal character spacing, 152 Page Format Clear bottom margin (ERCBM), 149 Set bottom margin (ERSBM), 149 Set form length (ERSFL). 149 Set top of form, 150 Tabs Set all horizontal tabs, 152 Set horizontal tabs, 152 Set vertical tabs, 150 Character Sets and Fonts Character set downline-loading, 161 Print single character from All Character set, 155 Select All character set, 154 Select Character set A (ERCO1). 154 Select Character set B (ERCO2), 154 Printer Modes Automatic line feed, 150 Bidirectional printing (ERDUD), 1563 Carriage return (PCR1), 151 Disable paper out (ERDPO), 153 Enable paper out (EREPO), 153 Unidirectional printing (EREUD), 153 219 Printing Quality Set draft printing (ERDHR). 157 Set letter quality/near letter quality printing (EREHR). 156 Select print quality. 157 Text Highlighting Disable shadow bolding (ERDBD), 156 Enable shadow bolding (EREBD), 156 Enable superscript and subscript (ERESCR), 158 Reset script (ERDSCR), 158 Set/reset overscore, 157 Set/reset underlining (EREUL), 157 Graphics Mode 480 bit image (Escape K). 159 960 bit image (Escape L). 159 960 bit image at normal speed (Escape Y), 160 1920 bit image (Escape Z). 160 Terminal Management i Deselect printer, 146 IBM Proprinter Emulation mode (DECIPEM), 146 IBM terminal reset, 146 Reset to initial state (RIS). 146 Soft terminal reset (STR), 146 220 INDEXES i S s i o e o s i [ s s e St i i s s B g e
Home
Privacy and Data
Site structure and layout ©2025 Majenko Technologies